Invensys Pneumatic Products Catalog

Invensys Pneumatic Products Catalog
Invensys
Pneumatic
Products Catalog
Design innovation with uncompromised reliability
General Information
Invensys Building Systems
Invensys Building Systems is part of the Invensys Controls family with a long tradition of global leadership in
building controls technology. We off the most extensive line of controls and components available to today’s
market, including valve bodies, valve assemblies, actuation devices and sensors, as well as interfaces, and
automated systems that link these products and other building systems together.
With many patents awarded for our product designs, Invensys offers the most innovative line of state-of-the-art
HVAC control systems and devices in the industry. Superior engineering, combined with ISO 9001 certification and
six-sigma lean manufacturing, ensures that our products conform to the highest standards of internationally
recognized quality, providing solid performance, unsurpassed value, and exceptional reliability for our customers.
Through OEM’s, Distributors, and a world-wide network of Field Offices, Invensys Building Systems is a single
source for all building control needs. Consult www.invensysbuildings.com (choose Contact Us, and click on the
Office Locator) for your nearest Invensys distributor.
Invensys Building Systems Pneumatic Products
Building on the heritage of the Robertshaw and Barber-Colman pneumatic product families, Invensys Building
Systems offers a complete range of pneumatic products, including thermostats, sensors, valve and damper
actuators, controllers, Pneumodular® control panels, and a wide range of accessories to provide all the pneumatic
control components needed for the installation and maintenance of complete pneumatic systems.
Organization and Index Systems
The Invensys Building Systems Pneumatic Products Catalog is organized alphanumerically by product number.
For a brief description of the model numbering system, consult the Part Numbering System chart on the following
page. A Subject Index follows and a Model Number Index. The Subject Index is used when you know what subject you are looking for, but are not sure of the specific model number of a specific product. The Model Number
Index mirrors the organization of the catalog and is used when you know the specific model number.
Other Invensys Building Systems Product Catalogs
Invensys Building Systems also offers a complete range of electric/electronic products and valves in addition to its
pneumatic products. These are covered in separate catalogs — see the back cover for further information.
All specifications are nominal and may change as design improvements are introduced. Invensys shall not be liable for damages
resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
F-27383
© 2005 Invensys PLC. All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
i
ii
Part Numbering System
Primary Designation
(First Letter)
HS
humidity sensor, electronic
A
Accessories
HSP
H
Humidity
humidity transmitter,
electronic
P
Pressure
S
Switch or Step Controller
V
Valve
C
Controller or
Controlled Device
MA
M
Motor (Actuator)
MC
R
Receiver-Controller or
P.E. Switch
transmitter, pneumatic
RKSR
receiver-controller, pneumatic
replacement
S
switch, pneumatic
SLC
controller, solid-state
SP
step controller, proportional,
electric, pneumatic, or
electronic
HTSP
humidity/temperature
transmitter, electronic
M
motor, pneumatic, with or
without positioner
T
motor, two-position, spring
return, electric
thermostat or transmitter,
pneumatic
TA
motor, two-position
(three-wire), electric
thermostat, two-position,
electric
TC
accessories, modular control
systems (PNEUMODULAR®)
thermostat, two-position,
electric
TF
thermostat, floating
MCS
Alpha Prefix Combinations
ME
motor
THC
enthalpy controller, electric
AD
accessory, electronic or
electronic control package
MF
motor, floating, proportional
THCR
MK
motor, pneumatic
enthalpy controller, electric
replacement
AE
accessory, electric
MK4
thermostat, pneumatic
accessory, humidity
motor, pneumatic with
positive positioner
TK
AH
TKR
AK
pneumatic relay or positioner
MM
motor, modular
thermostat, pneumatic
replacement
AKR
accessory, pneumatic
replacement
MMC
control card, modular motor
TKS
temperature transmitters,
pneumatic
MMR
replacement motor, modular
AKS
accessory, pneumatic
TOOL
MP
AL
accessory, pneumatic or
E.P. relays
motor, proportional, electric or
electronic
calibration fixtures, kits,
and tools
TP
MS
motor, proportional, electronic
thermostat, proportional,
electric or electronic
MU
motor, proportional, temp.,
electric or electronic
TR
thermostat, pneumatic
replacement
AM
accessory, motor
AP
accessory, pressure
ASP
accessory, electronic
N
thermostat, accessories
TS
AT
accessory, thermostat
P
temperature sensor,
electronic
AV
accessory, valve
TSP
C
cover, 2" x 2" pneumatic
thermostats
pressure or differential
pressure transmitter, or
receiver-controller, pneumatic
temperature transmitter,
electronic
PC
VA
controller/controlled device,
electronic
pressure, two-position
(three-wire), electric
valve, two-position, spring
return, electric
PCP
VB
valve body
CN
multi-purpose bridge,
electronic
PNEUMODULAR control
panels
VC
PF
pressure, floating, electric
valve, two-position
(three-wire), electric
CP
controller/controlled device,
electronic
PKSR
VK
valve, pneumatic
VK4
CT
cover, 2" x 2" pneumatic
thermostats
differential water pressure or
air velocity transmitters,
pneumatic
valve, pneumatic with positive
positioner
PP
VM
valve, modular motor
H
humidistat or humidity
transmitter, pneumatic
pressure, proportional,
electric or pneumatic
R
VP
valve, proportional, electric
or electronic
HC
humidity, two-position
(three-wire), electric
electric power relays,
pneumatic relays, P.E.
switches, and VAV controllers
VS
valve, electronic
HKS
humidity or enthalpy
CC
RKS
receiver-controller, pneumatic
iii
iv
Subject Index
Accessories
Bulb Wells
Actuator Shaft Extension ............................................. 166
Adjustment Cover ................................................. 161, 162
Aspirating Box for T-Series (2 x 2 in.) Devices .............. 1
Back Plate .............................................................. 160, 162
Backplate ....................................................................... 183
Ball-joint ......................................................................... 178
Ball-joint, swivel ............................................................ 178
Clevis ............................................................................. 167
Clevis Pin ....................................................................... 178
Cover .............................................................................. 165
Cover Plate .................................................................... 183
Crank Arm ...................................................................... 166
Damper Actuator Accessories ..................................... 178
Dial Stop Pins ................................................................ 169
Differential Pressure Pick-ups ..................................... 174
Eye rod ........................................................................... 179
Feedback Springs ........................................................... 68
Hex coupling ................................................................. 178
Mortar-joint Fitting ................................................ 159, 160
Mounting Plate .............................................................. 163
Mounting Plates ............................................................ 162
Pivot Stud ...................................................................... 167
Pressure Sensing Tips ................................................. 168
Push rod ........................................................................ 179
Receiver Controller Setpoint Adjuster and Scale
Plates ........................................................................ 13
Right Angle Bracket ...................................................... 178
Rod End Connector ...................................................... 168
Slotted Crank Arm ........................................................ 179
Snap-in Fitting ............................................................... 161
Sunshield ....................................................................... 163
Thermostat Covers ......................................................... 25
Thermostat Guard ............... 159, 160, 161, 171, 172, 173
TOOLS ............................................................................ 189
Tubing .................................................................... 157, 160
Unit Ventilator Sub-Panels ............................................. 24
Wall Plate ....................................................................... 158
Bulb Well ........................................................................170
Copper Well ....................................................................163
Immersion Well ..............................................................169
Stainless Steel Well .......................................................164
Actuators
Damper Actuators, Proportional ...................... 51, 57, 62
Floor Mounted Damper Actuators ................................. 59
Pneumatic Damper Actuators .................................. 42, 48
Pneumatic Valve Actuator .............................................. 47
Valve Actuators, Proportional .......................... 53, 55, 61
Adaptors
Adaptor Plate ......................................................... 161, 162
Brass Adaptor for T150 Immersion Transmitter ........ 164
Gauge Adaptor ............................................. 157, 158, 174
Installation Adaptor ...................................................... 175
Neck Extension Adaptor .............................................. 164
Controllers
Airstream Temperature Controllers .............................133
Pneumatic Limit Controls ...............................................64
Single/Dual Transmitter Input Receiver Controllers ..110
Unit Temperature Controllers .......................................134
Enclosures
Control Cabinets ................................................................5
Gauges
Pressure Gauges ...................................................... 23, 41
Receiver Gauges ...............................................................2
Humidistat
Room Humidistat .............................................................32
Kits
Brace Kit .........................................................................168
Calibration Kit ................................................................165
Lock Cover Screw Kit ....................................................168
Positioner Kits .................................................................68
Stop Kit ...........................................................................159
Thermostat Coversion Kit .............................................176
T-Series Thermostat Kits ..............................................122
Mounting
Duct Mounting Kit ..........................................................169
Frame Mounting Kit .......................................................166
Liquid Line or Tank Mounting Kit ................................170
Mounting Base Dual ......................................................171
Mounting Base Single ...................................................170
Mounting Box .................................................................157
Mounting Bracket ................................................. 175, 182
Mounting Hardware Kit .................................................181
Mounting Plate ..............................................158, 167, 175
Mounting Post ................................................................178
Mounting Ring ...................................................... 157, 159
Offset Mounting Bracket ...............................................178
v
Subject Index
PNEUMODULAR
Thermostats
2 to 1 Ratio Amplifying Relay ...................................... 106
Accessories ...................................................................182
Averaging Relay ............................................................108
Capacity Tank ..................................................................88
Diverting Relays ....................................................... 90, 92
Electric-Pneumatic Relays ..............................................96
Gradual Switches ..........................................................113
Integral Relay ...................................................................88
Multi-Input High and Low Selector Relay ....................100
PNEUMODULAR Parts Kit ............................................186
Pressure Regulator .......................................................115
Receiver Controller .........................................................72
Reversing Relay ...............................................................94
Signal Repeating Relay .................................................102
Summation Relay ..........................................................104
Two-, Three-, Four-Position Selector Switches ..........116
Volume Booster/Pressure Selector Relays ...................98
Dual Setpoint, Single Output Room Thermostats ...... 142
Dual Setpoint/Deadband Room Thermostat ............... 127
Energy Conservation Summer-Winter Room
Thermostat .............................................................. 125
Relay Bulb Thermostats .......................................150, 152
Room Thermostats ....................................................... 119
Single Setpoint Room Thermostats ............................ 136
Submaster Room Thermostats .................................... 140
Unitary Bulb Thermostats ............................................ 148
Zero Energy Band Room Thermostats ....................... 145
Relays
Air Motion Relay ..............................................................81
Booster Relay ..................................................................79
Differential Logic Module Relay .......................................9
High Pressure Selector Relay ........................................79
Limiting, 1 to 1 Ratio Relay and Scale Plates ...............11
Low Pressure Selector Relay .........................................79
Positive Positioning Relay ......................................... 7, 67
Restrictors
In-line Restrictor ............................................................177
Restrictor ........................................................................174
Restrictor Tee ................................................................177
Solenoid Air Valves
Air Switching Valve .........................................................17
Solenoid Air Valve .............................................. 15, 19, 21
Switches
Air Differential Pressure Switch .....................................83
Low Differential Pneumatic-Electric Switch ..................66
Pneumatic Liquid Flow Switch .......................................65
Pneumatic to Electric Pressure Switches,
Two-Position .............................................................75
Pneumatic-Electric High/Low Alarm Switch .................85
Pneumatic-Electric Switches ..........................................86
Thermometers
Dial Thermometers ........................................................156
vi
Tools
Adaptor for Test Gauge ................................................ 189
Allen Wrench ................................................................. 191
Branch Line and Test Gauge ....................................... 189
Branch Test Adaptor .............................................189, 190
Calibration and Cover-screw Wrench ......................... 174
Calibration Instrument .................................................. 190
Gauges and Tubing ....................................................... 189
Hex Wrench ................................................................... 191
Insertion Tool ................................................................ 189
Manual Hand Pump Bulb .............................................. 189
Needle and Adaptor ...................................................... 189
Pneumatic Calibration Tool Kit .................................... 190
Pneumatic Thermostat Calibration Kit ........................ 190
Pocket Wrench .............................................................. 189
Spring Hook ................................................................... 189
Transmitters
Differential or Static Pressure Transmitters ................. 70
Differential Pressure Transmitter .................................. 77
Duct EnthalpyTransmitter .............................................. 40
Duct Relative Humidity Transmitter .............................. 36
Duct, Immersion and Outdoor-Air
Temperature Transmitters .................................... 131
Pressure Transmitters .................................................... 69
Room and Light Troffer Temperature Transmitters ... 154
Room Humidity Transmitter ........................................... 34
Room Temperature Transmitter .................................. 129
Room/Duct Humidity Transmitters ................................ 38
Model Number Index
Model
Page
Numerics
10-11 ............................................. 157
10-15 .................................................1
10-22 ............................................. 157
10-23 ............................................. 157
10-47 ............................................. 158
10-48 ............................................. 158
10-50 ............................................. 158
10-51 ............................................. 158
10-53 ............................................. 159
10-57 ............................................. 159
10-58 .................................... 126, 159
10-59 ............................................. 159
10-62 ............................................. 160
10-63 ............................................. 160
10-64 ............................................. 160
10-66 ............................................. 160
10-72 ............................................. 161
10-73 ............................................. 161
10-76 ............................................. 161
10-77 ............................................. 161
10-78 ............................................. 162
10-80 ............................................. 162
10-81 ............................................. 162
10-81-48 ........................................ 162
10-82 ............................................. 162
10-82-47 ........................................ 162
10-82-48 ............................... 162, 162
10-82-SS ....................................... 162
100-13 ........................................... 163
100-17 ........................................... 163
100-25 ........................................... 163
100-47 ........................................... 164
100-49 ........................................... 164
100-71 ........................................... 164
20 .................................................. 164
20-042 ........................................... 163
20-642 ........................................... 157
20-676 ...............................................1
20-693 ........................................... 157
20-695 ...............................................1
20-699 ........................................... 157
20-705 ........................................... 158
20-706 ........................................... 158
20-707 ........................................... 159
20-710 ........................................... 159
20-711 ........................................... 159
20-712 ........................................... 159
20-714 ........................................... 161
20-715 ........................................... 160
20-716 ........................................... 160
20-720 ........................................... 162
20-757 ........................................... 158
20-758 ........................................... 158
20-777 ........................................... 163
20-778 ........................................... 163
20-782 ........................................... 163
20-803 ........................................... 164
Model
20-805
20-850
20-881
20-944
21-038
21-039
21-065
21-068
21-069
21-152
21-153
21-183
21-238
21-239
21-450
21-451
21-452
21-453
21-454
21-456
21-458
21-459
21-460
21-468
21-473
21-617
21-721
21-790
21-791
21-792
21-793
21-800
21-806
21-807
21-810
21-876
21-881
21-884
21-889
21-890
21-891
21-894
21-923
21-928
21-933
21-939
21-943
21-948
21-957
21-960
21-964
22-022
22-101
22-104
22-106
22-110
22-112
22-120
Page
.......................................... 164
.......................................... 162
.......................................... 174
.......................................... 174
.......................................... 177
.......................................... 177
.......................................... 175
.......................................... 175
.......................................... 175
.......................................... 186
.................................. 177, 186
.......................................... 174
.......................................... 174
.......................................... 174
............................................ 72
............................................ 72
............................................ 72
............................................ 72
............................................ 72
............................................ 72
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
.......................................... 160
.......................................... 161
.................................. 187, 188
.......................................... 186
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
.......................................... 161
.......................................... 179
.......................................... 178
.......................................... 180
.......................................... 161
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
............................................ 73
...................................... 28, 29
...................................... 28, 29
...................................... 28, 29
...................................... 28, 29
...................................... 28, 29
...................................... 28, 29
...................................... 28, 29
...................................... 28, 29
.......................................... 162
.......................................... 176
.......................................... 183
.......................................... 183
.......................................... 183
.......................................... 183
.......................................... 183
.......................................... 185
Model
22-121
22-122
22-130
22-132
22-133
22-134
22-135
22-136
22-137
22-138
22-139
22-140
22-141
22-142
22-143
22-144
22-145
22-150
22-151
22-152
22-155
22-156
22-157
22-180
22-181
22-183
22-184
22-195
22-196
22-301
22-302
22-303
22-304
22-305
22-306
22-311
22-313
22-314
22-315
22-316
22-317
22-319
22-320
22-324
22-332
22-337
22-338
22-339
22-345
22-346
22-347
22-351
22-352
22-353
22-401
22-823
22-828
22-833
Page
........................................... 184
...................................184, 186
...................................185, 186
........................................... 184
...................................184, 186
...................................185, 186
...................................184, 186
...................................183, 186
...................................183, 186
.......................... 174, 184, 186
...................................184, 186
...................................185, 186
...................................185, 186
........................................... 185
........................................... 183
........................................... 183
........................................... 186
........................................... 182
........................................... 182
........................................... 182
........................................... 182
........................................... 182
........................................... 182
........................................... 187
........................................... 187
........................................... 187
........................................... 187
...................................187, 188
...................................187, 188
........................................... 114
........................................... 114
........................................... 114
........................................... 114
........................................... 114
...................................114, 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 117
........................................... 114
........................................... 117
........................................... 114
........................................... 164
.......................................28, 29
.......................................28, 29
.......................................28, 29
vii
Model Number Index
Model
Page
Model
Page
22-839 .......................................28, 29
22-843 .......................................28, 29
22-857 .......................................28, 29
22-923 .......................................28, 29
22-928 .......................................28, 29
22-933 .......................................28, 29
22-939 .......................................28, 29
22-943 ............................................. 29
22-957 .......................................28, 29
22-960 .......................................28, 29
2211-012 ....................................... 119
2211-013 ....................................... 119
2211-112 ....................................... 119
2211-113 ....................................... 119
2211-411 ....................................... 119
2211-412 ....................................... 119
2211-41x ....................................... 122
2211-512 ....................................... 119
2211-513 ....................................... 119
2212-118 ....................................... 120
2212-119 ....................................... 120
2212-128 ....................................... 120
2212-129 ....................................... 120
2212-301 ....................................... 120
2212-302 ....................................... 120
2212-304 ....................................... 120
2212-318 ....................................... 127
2212-319 ....................................... 127
2212-418 ....................................... 120
2212-419 ....................................... 120
2212-41x ....................................... 122
2212-518 ....................................... 120
2212-519 ....................................... 120
2212-51x ...............................122, 122
2212-538 ....................................... 127
2212-539 ....................................... 127
2214-121 ....................................... 120
2214-122 ....................................... 120
2214-131 ....................................... 120
2214-132 ....................................... 120
2214-521 ....................................... 120
2214-522 ....................................... 120
2214-52x ....................................... 122
2216-126 ....................................... 120
2216-136 ....................................... 120
2216-526 ...............................120, 122
2218-132 ....................................... 121
2218-133 ....................................... 121
2218-134 ....................................... 121
2218-142 ....................................... 121
2218-301 ....................................... 125
2218-532 ....................................... 121
2218-534 ....................................... 125
2218-53x ....................................... 122
2220-053 ....................................... 129
2230-018 ......................................... 32
2232-053 ......................................... 34
2232-150 ......................................... 36
2252-110
2252-151
2252-250
2252-251
2252-252
2252-273
2252-501
2252-502
2252-510
2252-610
2252-635
2252-655
2252-662
2252-701
2252-702
2252-703
2260-550
2260-551
2298-060
2298-061
2298-062
2298-063
2301-040
2301-150
2301-300
2302-051
2302-101
2323-500
2323-503
2323-504
2323-505
2341-501
2341-502
2341-521
2341-522
2351-001
2353-501
2353-502
2353-503
2354-501
2354-502
2354-503
2354-504
2360-501
2364-202
2364-211
2364-220
2368-500
2368-501
2368-502
2368-503
2368-520
2368-521
2368-522
2368-523
2372-351
2372-352
2372-501
.......................................131
.......................................132
.......................................131
.......................................131
.......................................131
.......................................132
.......................................131
.......................................131
.......................................131
.......................................131
.......................................131
.......................................132
.......................................132
.......................................132
.......................................132
.......................................132
.......................................133
.......................................133
.......................................134
.......................................134
.......................................134
.......................................134
.........................................69
.........................................69
.........................................69
.........................................77
.........................................77
.........................................70
.........................................70
.........................................70
.........................................70
.........................................72
.........................................72
.........................................72
.........................................72
.........................................88
.........................................90
.........................................90
.........................................90
.........................................92
.........................................92
.........................................92
.........................................92
.........................................94
.........................................66
.........................................86
.........................................86
.........................................96
.........................................96
.........................................96
.........................................96
.........................................96
.........................................96
.........................................96
.........................................96
.........................................79
.........................................79
.........................................98
viii
Model
Page
2372-502 ........................................ 98
2373-501 ...................................... 100
2374-401 .................................. 81, 83
2375-501 ...................................... 104
2376-501 ...................................... 108
2378-501 ...................................... 106
2379-501 ...................................... 102
2386-601 ........................................ 85
2390-501 ...................................... 113
2390-505 ...................................... 113
2390-510 ...................................... 113
2390-515 ...................................... 115
2392-504 ...................................... 116
2392-505 ...................................... 116
2393-504 ...................................... 116
2393-505 ...................................... 116
2394-504 ...................................... 116
2394-505 ...................................... 116
2420-001 ........................................ 41
2420-002 ........................................ 41
2420-003 ........................................ 41
2420-004 ........................................ 41
2420-005 ........................................ 41
2420-006 ........................................ 41
2422-001 .......................................... 2
2422-002 .......................................... 2
2422-003 .......................................... 2
2803-100 ...................................... 185
2803-500 ...................................... 185
2850-017 ........................................ 68
2850-018 ........................................ 68
2850-019 ........................................ 68
2850-020 ........................................ 68
2850-028 ........................................ 68
2850-031 ........................................ 68
2850-053 ........................................ 68
2850-054 ........................................ 68
2850-058 ...................................... 181
2890-010 .................................. 28, 29
2890-011 .................................. 28, 29
2890-012 .................................. 28, 29
2890-500 ...................................... 186
2890-520 ...................................... 185
2890-522 ...................................... 184
2890-530 ...................................... 185
2890-533 ...................................... 184
2890-534 ...................................... 185
2890-535 ...................................... 184
2890-536 ...................................... 183
2890-540 ...................................... 185
2890-541 ...................................... 185
300 .................................................. 73
300-25 ............................................ 72
300-26 ............................................ 72
300-27 ............................................ 72
300-28 ............................................ 72
300-29 ............................................ 72
300-31 ............................................ 72
Model Number Index
Model
Page
300-33 .............................................73
300-34 .............................................73
300-35 .............................................73
300-37 .............................................72
300-38 .............................................72
300-39 .............................................72
300-41 .............................................72
300-46 .............................................73
300-47 .............................................73
300-48 .............................................73
300-52 .............................................73
300-54 .............................................73
300-56 .............................................73
300-57 .............................................73
300-58 .............................................73
300-70 .............................................73
300-71 .............................................73
300-72 .............................................73
300-80 .............................................73
300-81 .............................................73
300-82 .............................................73
300-83 .............................................73
300-84 .............................................73
300-86 .............................................73
300-95 .............................................73
50-01 ............................................. 114
50-02 ............................................. 114
50-03 ............................................. 114
50-04 ............................................. 114
50-05 ............................................. 114
50-06 .................................... 114, 117
50-09 ............................................. 117
50-13 ............................................. 117
50-14 ............................................. 117
50-15 ............................................. 117
50-16 ............................................. 117
50-17 ............................................. 117
50-18 ............................................. 117
50-19 ............................................. 117
50-20 ............................................. 117
50-23 ............................................. 117
50-24 ............................................. 117
50-32 ............................................. 117
50-37 ............................................. 117
50-38 ............................................. 117
50-39 ............................................. 117
50-45 ............................................. 117
50-46 ............................................. 117
50-47 ............................................. 117
50-48 ............................................. 117
50-49 ............................................. 117
50-51 ............................................. 114
50-52 ............................................. 117
50-53 ............................................. 114
6-371 ............................................. 157
900-002 .........................................165
A
A201 ................................................41
Model
Page
A203 ............................................... 41
A204-03 .......................................... 41
A204-04 .......................................... 41
A205-01 .......................................... 41
A205-02 .......................................... 41
A251-1 .............................................. 2
A252 ................................................. 2
A253-12 ............................................ 2
AE-629 ............................................. 5
AE-630 ............................................. 5
AE-630-101 ...................................... 6
AE-631 ............................................. 5
AE-631-101 ...................................... 6
AE-632 ............................................. 5
AE-662-501 ...................................... 5
AE-662-502 ...................................... 5
AE-662-503 ...................................... 5
AK-42309-500 .................................. 7
AK-52101 ......................................... 9
AKR-40605 ..................................... 11
AKS-1100 ....................................... 13
AKS-4 ........................................... 165
AKS-5 ........................................... 165
AL-150 ............................................ 15
AL-151 ............................................ 15
AL-152 ............................................ 15
AL-153 ............................................ 15
AL-155 ............................................ 15
AL-161-4 ......................................... 17
AL-170 ............................................ 19
AL-171 ............................................ 19
AL-180 ............................................ 19
AL-181 ............................................ 19
AL-181-201 ..................................... 19
AL-182 ............................................ 19
AL-183 ............................................ 19
AL-185 ............................................ 19
AL-190 ............................................ 21
AL-191 ............................................ 21
AL-192 ............................................ 21
AL-193 ............................................ 21
AL-195 ............................................ 21
AL-322 ............................................ 23
AL-323 ............................................ 23
AL-327 ............................................ 23
AL-353 ............................................ 23
AL-362 ............................................ 23
AL-7111 .......................................... 24
AL-7112 .......................................... 24
AL-7115 .......................................... 24
AL-7121 .......................................... 24
AM-132 ......................................... 166
AM-530 ......................................... 166
AM-532 ......................................... 166
AM-533 ......................................... 166
AM-534 ......................................... 167
AM-535 ......................................... 167
AM-536 ......................................... 167
Model
Page
AM-538 ......................................... 168
AM-541 ......................................... 167
AM-542 ......................................... 168
AM-543 ......................................... 166
AM-545 ......................................... 168
AP-302 .......................................... 168
AP-305 .......................................... 168
AT-101 .......................................... 168
AT-104 .......................................... 169
AT-1103 ........................................ 171
AT-1104 ........................................ 171
AT-1105 ........................................ 172
AT-1155 ........................................ 172
AT-1163 ........................................ 171
AT-1165 ........................................ 173
AT-201 .......................................... 169
AT-203 .......................................... 169
AT-206 .......................................... 169
AT-208 .......................................... 169
AT-209 .......................................... 170
AT-219 .......................................... 170
AT-504 .......................................... 170
AT-505 .......................................... 170
AT-546 .......................................... 171
B
BEZ-12 ..................................187, 188
BEZ-6 ....................................187, 188
C
C1-42 ........................................26, 27
C1-43 ........................................26, 27
C1-46 ........................................26, 27
C1-47 ........................................26, 27
C10-42 ............................................ 31
C10-46 ............................................ 31
C11-42 ......................................26, 27
C11-43 ......................................26, 27
C11-46 ......................................26, 27
C11-47 ......................................26, 27
C13-42 ............................................ 31
C14-42 ......................................31, 31
C14-43 ............................................ 31
C14-46 ............................................ 31
C14-47 ............................................ 31
C15-42 ............................................ 31
C2-42 .............................................. 31
C2-43 .............................................. 31
C2-46 .............................................. 31
C2-47 .............................................. 31
C3-42 ........................................26, 27
C3-43 ........................................26, 27
C3-46 ........................................26, 27
C3-47 ........................................26, 27
C3X42 ............................................. 31
C3X62 .......................................26, 27
C4-42 ........................................26, 27
C4-43 ........................................26, 27
C4-46 ........................................26, 27
ix
Model Number Index
Model
Page
C4-47 ........................................26, 27
C4X42 ............................................. 31
C4X62 .......................................26, 27
C5-42 ........................................26, 27
C5-46 .............................................. 27
C5-47 .............................................. 27
C6-42 ........................................26, 27
C6-43 ........................................26, 27
C6-46 .............................................. 27
C6-47 .............................................. 27
C6X42 ............................................. 31
CT-11-000 ....................................... 30
CT-11-400 ....................................... 30
CT-11-403 ....................................... 30
CT-11-404 ....................................... 30
CT-11-407 ....................................... 30
CT-12-000 ....................................... 30
CT-12-400 ....................................... 30
CT-12-403 ....................................... 30
CT-12-404 ....................................... 30
CT-12-407 ....................................... 30
CT-21-000 ....................................... 30
CT-21-116 ....................................... 30
CT-21-400 ....................................... 30
CT-21-403 ....................................... 30
CT-21-404 ....................................... 30
CT-21-407 ....................................... 30
CT-21-420 ....................................... 30
CT-21-421 ....................................... 30
D
DOOR-12B ............................187,
DOOR-12WL .........................187,
DOOR-6B ..............................187,
DOOR-6WL ...........................187,
188
188
188
188
H
H150-100 ........................................ 36
H18-301 .......................................... 32
H53-301 .......................................... 34
HKS-2033 ....................................... 38
HKS-5033 ....................................... 38
HKS-8065 ....................................... 40
K
K500
K502
K503
K504
K511
K512
K514
............................................... 88
............................................. 182
............................................. 182
............................................. 182
.....................................116, 182
.....................................116, 182
.....................................116, 182
L
LABL-1 .......................................... 183
LABL-2 .......................................... 183
M
M556 .......................................42, 178
M556-14 .......................................... 44
M556-1402 ...................................... 44
x
Model
Page
M556-51 ..........................................44
M556-5101 ......................................44
M556-5102 ......................................44
M570 ...............................................42
M572 .............................................178
M572-2308 ......................................42
M572-2311 ......................................42
M572-3308 ......................................42
M572-3311 ......................................42
M572-5308 ......................................42
M572-5311 ......................................42
M572-6308 ......................................42
M572-6311 ......................................42
M572-8308 ......................................42
M572-8311 ......................................42
M573 ...............................................42
M573-1108 ......................................43
M573-1111 ......................................43
M573-1520 ......................................43
M573-2108 ......................................43
M573-2111 ......................................43
M573-2520 ......................................43
M573-3108 ......................................43
M573-3111 ......................................43
M573-3520 ......................................43
M573-5108 ......................................43
M573-5111 ......................................43
M573-5520 ......................................43
M573-6108 ......................................43
M573-6111 ......................................43
M573-6520 ......................................43
M573-8108 ......................................43
M573-8111 ......................................43
M573-8520 ......................................43
M574 ................................ 42, 46, 178
M574-1054 ......................................44
M574-1208 ......................................44
M574-1211 ......................................44
M574-1520 ......................................44
M574-2208 ......................................44
M574-2211 ......................................44
M574-2520 ......................................44
M574-3208 ......................................44
M574-3211 ......................................44
M574-3520 ......................................44
M574-5208 ......................................44
M574-5211 ......................................44
M574-6208 ......................................44
M574-6211 ......................................44
M574-6520 ......................................44
M574-8208 ......................................44
M574-8211 ......................................44
M574-8520 ......................................44
M583 ...................................... 42, 178
M583-0520 ......................................43
M584 .............................................178
M584-0211 ......................................43
MCS-BP1 ......................................183
Model
Page
MCS-BP10 .................................... 183
MCS-BP12 .................................... 183
MCS-BP4 ...................................... 183
MCS-BP6 ...................................... 183
MCS-CP ....................................... 183
MCS-CT ........................................ 183
MCS-CV ....................................... 183
MCS-EB ........................................ 183
MCS-EC ....................................... 184
MCS-G .................................. 116, 184
MCS-GA ............................... 174, 184
MCS-GM ....................................... 184
MCS-GMF .................................... 184
MCS-LABEL ................................. 184
MCS-MS ....................................... 184
MCS-PLUG ................................... 185
MCS-PS ........................................ 185
MCS-PTS ..................................... 185
MCS-S .................................. 116, 185
MCS-S-P ...................................... 185
MCS-SC ....................................... 185
MCS-SCREW ............................... 185
MCS-TC ........................................ 185
MCS-TUBE ................................... 185
MK .................................................. 55
MK-12100 ....................................... 62
MK-12110 ....................................... 62
MK-12120 ....................................... 62
MK-12140 ....................................... 62
MK-2690 ......................................... 47
MK-3101 ......................................... 48
MK-3111 ......................................... 48
MK-3121 ......................................... 49
MK-3141 ......................................... 49
MK-3151 ......................................... 49
MK-3161 ......................................... 49
MK-3821 ......................................... 49
MK-4401 ......................................... 51
MK-4411 ......................................... 51
MK-4421 ......................................... 51
MK-4451 ......................................... 51
MK-4461 ......................................... 51
MK-4601 ......................................... 53
MK-4611 ......................................... 53
MK-4621 ......................................... 53
MK-4621-422 .................................. 53
MK-4641 ......................................... 53
MK-6601 ......................................... 55
MK-6611 ......................................... 55
MK-6621 ......................................... 55
MK-6801 ......................................... 55
MK-6811 ......................................... 55
MK-6821 ......................................... 55
MK-6911 ......................................... 55
MK-7101 ......................................... 57
MK-7121 ......................................... 57
MK-71xx ....................................... 167
MK-7821 ......................................... 59
Model Number Index
Model
Page
MK-7921 .........................................59
MK-8801 .........................................61
MK-8811 .........................................61
MK-8821 .........................................61
MK-88xx ..........................................61
MK-8901 .........................................61
MK-8911 .........................................61
MK-8921 .........................................61
MK-89xx ..........................................61
MK4-3121 .......................................49
MK4-3821 .......................................49
MK4-4401 .......................................51
MK4-4411 .......................................51
MK4-4421 .......................................51
MK4-4451 .......................................51
MK4-4461 .......................................51
MK4-4601 .......................................53
MK4-4611 .......................................53
MK4-4621 .......................................53
MK4-7101 .......................................57
MK4-7121 ................................ 57, 57
N
N1-51 ............................................ 174
N1-52 ............................................ 174
N1-53 ............................................ 174
N100-0005 .................................... 177
N100-0010 .................................... 177
N100-2366 .................................... 186
N100-2500 .................................... 186
N100-2501 ........................... 177, 186
N100-2502 .................................... 186
N100-2509 ......................................64
N100-2511 ......................................65
N100-2513 ......................................64
N100-4017 ......................................66
N100-9901 ........................................5
N100-9915 ........................... 187, 188
N2-4 .............................................. 174
N4-150 .......................................... 186
N4-32 ............................................ 174
N5-49 ............................................ 175
N5-52 ............................................ 175
N5-53 ............................................ 175
N5-95 ............................................ 176
N800-0555-Box ...................... 67, 179
N800-0555-P ...................................67
N800-0801 .................................... 178
N800-0803 .................................... 178
N800-0804 .................................... 178
N800-0901 .................................... 178
N800-0902 .................................... 178
N800-0903 .................................... 178
N800-0904 .................................... 178
N800-0905 .................................... 178
N800-1100 .................................... 178
N800-1102 .................................... 178
N800-1105 .................................... 178
N800-1151 .................................... 178
Model
N800-1153
N800-1205
N800-1206
N800-1301
N800-1403
N800-1404
N800-1414
N800-1415
N800-1501
N800-1601
N800-1602
N800-1604
N800-1607
N800-1612
N800-1614
N800-1615
N800-1621
N800-1629
N800-1630
N800-1635
N800-1651
N800-1805
N800-1809
N800-1882
N800-1884
N800-1920
N800-2101
N800-2102
N800-2160
N800-2200
N800-2257
N800-2258
N800-2259
N800-2267
N800-2268
N800-2269
N800-2277
N800-2278
N800-2279
N800-4202
N800-4203
N800-4205
N800-4206
N800-4208
N800-4302
N800-4303
N800-4305
N800-4306
N800-4308
N800-4402
N800-4405
N800-4408
N800-9422
N800-9423
N800-9424
N800-9426
Page
.................................... 178
.................................... 178
.................................... 179
.................................... 178
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 179
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 180
.............................. 68, 180
.............................. 68, 180
.............................. 68, 180
.............................. 68, 180
.............................. 68, 180
.............................. 68, 180
.............................. 68, 180
.............................. 68, 180
.............................. 68, 180
.................................... 180
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
.................................... 181
P
P301-040 ........................................ 69
Model
Page
P301-150 ........................................ 69
P301-300 ........................................ 69
P323 ............................................... 70
P323-0025 ...................................... 70
P323-01 .......................................... 70
P323-03 .......................................... 70
P323-10 .......................................... 70
P323-101 ........................................ 70
P341 ............................................. 126
P541 .......................................72, 126
P541-BASE ..................................... 72
P541-DA-B ...................................... 72
P541-RA .................................72, 126
P541-RA-B ...................................... 72
PC-110 ............................................ 75
PC-131 ............................................ 75
PC-132 ............................................ 75
PC-151 ............................................ 75
PCP-12BD .................................... 187
PCP-12WL .................................... 187
PCP-12WL-BC .............................. 187
PCP-6BD ...................................... 187
PCP-6WL ...................................... 187
PCP-6WL-BC ................................ 187
PKSR-9001 ...............................77, 77
PKSR-9002 ..................................... 77
PLEX-12 ...............................187, 188
PLEX-6 .................................187, 188
R
R432-11 .......................................... 79
R432-2 ............................................ 79
R435 ............................................... 81
R436 ............................................... 83
R470 ............................................... 85
R471-1 ............................................ 86
R472-1 ............................................ 86
R500 ............................................... 88
R503-1 ............................................ 90
R503-2 ............................................ 90
R503-3 ............................................ 90
R504-1 ............................................ 92
R504-2 ............................................ 92
R504-3 ............................................ 92
R504-4 ............................................ 92
R516 ............................................... 94
R527-110 ........................................ 96
R527-230 ........................................ 96
R527-24 .......................................... 96
R527-24 DC .................................... 96
R528-110 ........................................ 96
R528-230 ........................................ 96
R528-24 .......................................... 96
R528-24 DC .................................... 96
R532-H ........................................... 98
R532-L ............................................ 98
R533 ............................................. 100
R534 ............................................. 102
R537 ............................................. 104
xi
Model Number Index
Model
Page
R539 ............................................. 106
R540 ............................................. 108
RKS-1001 ..................................... 110
RKS-2001 ..................................... 110
RKS-3002 ..................................... 110
RKS-4002 ...............................13, 110
RKS-5001 ..................................... 110
RKSR-4000 .............................13, 110
RNG-12 .................................187, 188
RNG-6 ...................................187, 188
S
S510 .....................................113, 113
S511 ............................................. 114
S511-10 ........................................ 113
S511-5 ..................................113, 114
S515 .....................................115, 115
S520 ............................ 116, 116, 117
S521 .....................................116, 117
S530 .....................................116, 117
S531 .....................................116, 117
S540 .....................................116, 117
S541 .....................................116, 117
T
T12-301 ........................................ 119
T12-3011 ...................................... 119
T12-3081 ...................................... 119
T13-301 ........................................ 119
T13-3011 ...................................... 119
T13-3081 ...................................... 119
T150-1011 .................................... 131
T150-1012 .................................... 131
T150-1013 .................................... 131
T150-1021 .................................... 131
T150-1022 .................................... 131
T150-1023 .................................... 131
T150-1031 .................................... 131
T150-1035 .................................... 131
T150-1041 .................................... 131
T150-1046 .................................... 132
T150-1054 .................................... 132
T150-1055 .................................... 132
T150-1062 .................................... 132
T150-1073 .................................... 132
T150-1082 .................................... 132
T150-1083 .................................... 132
T18-301 ........................................ 120
T18-3011 ...................................... 120
T18-305 ........................................ 120
T18-306 ................................120, 120
T18-3081 ...................................... 120
T18-3091 ...................................... 120
T19-301 ........................................ 120
T19-3011 ...................................... 120
T19-305 ........................................ 120
T19-306 ........................................ 120
T19-3081 ...................................... 120
T19-3091 ...................................... 120
xii
Model
Page
T1x-3081 .......................................122
T1x-3091 .......................................122
T201-023 .......................................133
T201-024 .......................................133
T23-301 .........................................120
T23-3011 .......................................120
T24-301 .........................................120
T24-3011 .......................................120
T27-301 .........................................120
T27-3011 .......................................120
T32-301 .........................................121
T32-3011 .......................................121
T32-321 .........................................121
T33-301 .........................................121
T34-3011 .......................................125
T35-301 .........................................127
T36-301 .........................................127
T460-301 .......................................134
T461-301 .......................................134
T462-301 .......................................134
T463-301 .......................................134
T53-101 .........................................129
TK-1001 ........................................136
TK-1001-116 .................................136
TK-1001-600 .................................136
TK-1071 ........................................140
TK-1071-116 .................................140
TK-1101 ........................................136
TK-1101-116 .................................136
TK-1101-600 .................................136
TK-1171 ........................................140
TK-1301 ........................................136
TK-1301-116 .................................136
TK-1381 ........................................136
TK-1601 ........................................136
TK-1601-116 .................................136
TK-1681 ........................................136
TK-1711 ........................................142
TK-1711-116 .................................142
TK-1717 ........................................142
TK-1717-116 .................................142
TK-1721 ........................................142
TK-1721-116 .................................142
TK-1727 ........................................142
TK-1727-116 .................................142
TK-1731 ........................................142
TK-1731-116 .................................142
TK-1741 ........................................142
TK-1741-116 .................................142
TK-1751 ........................................142
TK-1751-116 .................................142
TK-1761 ........................................142
TK-1801 ........................................145
TK-1811 ........................................145
TK-18x1 .........................................145
TK-2001 ........................................148
TK-2012 ........................................148
TK-2201 ........................................148
Model
Page
TK-3001 ........................................ 148
TK-3201 ........................................ 148
TK-4001 ........................................ 148
TK-4012 ........................................ 148
TK-4212 ........................................ 148
TK-4212-201 ................................. 148
TK-6024 ........................................ 150
TK-6124 ........................................ 150
TK-8024 ........................................ 150
TK-8124 ........................................ 150
TK-9637 ........................................ 152
TK-9737 ........................................ 152
TK-9838 ........................................ 152
TKR-1001 ..................................... 137
TKR-1001-116 .............................. 137
TKR-1101 ..................................... 137
TKR-1101-116 .............................. 137
TKR-1201 ..................................... 137
TKR-1281 ..................................... 137
TKR-1301 ..................................... 137
TKR-1381 ..................................... 137
TKR-1601 ..................................... 137
TKR-1681 ..................................... 137
TKR-1801 ..................................... 145
TKR-1811 ..................................... 145
TKR-5001 ..................................... 137
TKS-2031 ..................................... 132
TKS-4017 ..................................... 132
TKS-5001 ..................................... 154
TKS-5001-600 .............................. 154
TKS-6001 ..................................... 154
TKS-9017 ..................................... 132
TOOL-085 ..................................... 189
TOOL-100 ..................................... 190
TOOL-100-500 ............................. 190
TOOL-110 ..................................... 191
TOOL-111 ..................................... 191
TOOL-112 ..................................... 191
TOOL-113 ..................................... 191
TOOL-74 ....................................... 189
TOOL-76 ....................................... 189
TOOL-77 ....................................... 189
TOOL-79 ....................................... 189
TOOL-82 ....................................... 189
TOOL-86 ....................................... 189
TOOL-87 ....................................... 189
TOOL-90 ....................................... 189
TOOL-91 ....................................... 190
TOOL-95-1 ................................... 190
TOOL-96 ....................................... 190
TS-291 .......................................... 156
TS-292 .......................................... 156
TS-293 .......................................... 156
TS-294 .......................................... 156
10-15 (20695)
10-15 (20-695)
Pneumatic Products
Aspirating Box for T-Series (2 x 2 in.) Devices
These aspirating boxes are designed to permit
flush mounting of Txx (2 x 2 in.) pneumatic room
thermostats where room decor, instrument
protection, or other application requirements make
this desirable. These aspirators use control system
air on the venturi principle to induce the flow of
room air across a thermostat sensing element.
Features:
• Attractive appearance.
• Powerful aspirator ensures movement of room air through
aspirating box.
• Room air contacts sensing element quickly.
• Mounts 2 x 2 in. thermostats, humidistat, temperature or
humidity transmitter (except T27).
Model Chart
Model No.
10-15
—
Wholesale
Model No.
Description
20-695
Refer to Specifications.
20-676
20-695 with stainless steel cover.
Specifications
Construction
Cover
Hinged, 5/64 in. hexhead screws.
Finish
Satin chrome enamel.
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (refer. EN-123).
Minimum
15 psig (103 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Copper tubing, 8 ft. (2.4 m) length.
Air consumption
27.7 scim (7.5 mL/s).
Adjustments
None.
Mounting
Designed for the most common wall types.
Dimensions
4-3/4 W x 4-3/4 H x 3-1/8 D in. (121 x 121 x 79 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
TOOL-082
RH-33709-A26
Description
5/64 in. hexhead wrench.
1/8-40 UNC-2A 1-1/2 in. long round slotted screw.
1
A25x Series
A25x
Series
Receiver Gauges
Receiver gauges for continuous indication of
temperature, differential static pressure,
differential pressure, pressure, enthalpy, or
humidity in conjunction with a transmitter-receiver
system. Select “donut” type dials listed for
required application.
30
20
40
50
60
10
70
80
0
Features:
• Receiver-gauges receive output signals of pneumatic
transmitters and provide readout of measured (and/or
controlled) variables at convenient locations.
• Gauge dials available to match each pneumatic transmitter
range.
• 2 in. model available for stem mounting.
• 2-1/2 and 3-1/2 in. models available for flush mounting.
90
100
A251-1
A252
A253-12
Model Chart
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
2422-001a b
A251-1
Dial Size
In.
Pointer
2-1/2
A252
2422-002a c
3-1/2
A253-12
2422-003a d
2
Adjustable
Mounting
Flush with “U”
clamp for panels
Air Connection
Construction and Finish
Black plastic case
1/8 in. -27 MNPT center back
Stem
Zinc plated steel case with
chrome plated snap-out ring
Black plastic case
a
Wholesale supplies these as gauge kits. Each gauge kit includes a gauge and a gauge overlay kit.
b
To replace 2-1/2 in. gauge overlays, order Wholesale overlay kit 2890-002.
c
To replace 3-1/2 in. gauge overlays, order Wholesale overlay kit 2890-003.
d
To replace 2 in. gauge overlays, order Wholesale overlay kit 2890-001.
Options — Receiver Gauge Dials.
Range
2 in. for A253-12
2-1/2 in. for A251-1
3-1/2 in. for A252
0 to 100°F
40 to 140°F
40 to 240°F
-40 to 160°F
-25 to 125°F
50 to 90°F
62.5 to 92.5°F
30% to 80% RH
20 to 45 BTU/lb
-0.5 to +0.5 in. WC
0 to 3 in. WC
0 to 10 in. WC
30 to 80°F
-0.05 to +0.20 in. WC
-10 to 40 psig
Printed on dial face
23-51
23-52
23-53
23-54
23-56
—
23-58
23-61
23-62
23-63
23-64
23-65
—
23-67
24-50
24-51
24-52
24-53
24-54
24-56
24-57
24-58
24-61
24-62
24-63
24-64
24-65
24-66
24-67
25-50
25-51
25-52
25-53
25-54
25-56
25-57
25-58
25-61
25-62
25-63
25-64
25-65
25-66
25-67
2
For Use with the Following
Transmitters
T150-1021,1022, -1023
T150-1011,-1012, -1013
T150-1031,-1035
T150-1041, -1046
T150-1054,-1055
T53-301
100-51 (T461/T463 Sensor) D.A.
H53-301
H102-101
P323-01
P323-03
P323-10
T150-1062
P323-0025
P301-040
A25x Series
Options — Receiver Gauge Dials. (Continued)
Range
2 in. for A253-12
2-1/2 in. for A251-1
3-1/2 in. for A252
23-68a
23-69a
23-70
23-71
23-72
23-80
23-81
—
23-83
23-84
23-85
23-86
—
23-92
24-68a
24-69a
24-70
24-71
24-72
—
24-81
—
—
24-84
24-85
24-86
24-87
24-92
25-68a
25-69a
25-70
25-71
25-72
25-80
25-81
25-82
25-83
25-84
25-85
25-86
—
25-92
0 to 150 psig
0 to 300 psig
0 to 50 psig
0 to 100 psig
0% to 100% RH
200 to 2000 FPM
300 to 3000 FPM
400 to 4000 FPM
550 to 5500 FPM
50 to 100°F
50 to 150°F
10 to 90% RH
16 to 40 BTU/lb.
0 to 1.0 in. WC
a
For Use with the Following
Transmitters
P301-150
P301-300
Obsolete PKSR-9011
Obsolete PKSR-9002
H150-100
Obsolete PKSR-9101
Obsolete PKSR-9102
Obsolete PKSR-9103
Obsolete PKSR-9104
TKS-5001,-6001,T150-1073
T150-1082, -1083
HKS-2033, -5033
HKS-8065
P323-101
For corresponding Wholesale overlays (dials), refer to the Wholesale Receiver Gauge Overlays chart.
Wholesale Receiver Gauge Overlays.
Range
psig
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Dial Size
in.
-10 to 40
23-67
21-580
2
-10 to 40
24-67
21-581
2-1/2
3-1/2
-10 to 40
25-67
21-582
0 to 150
23-68
21-583
2
0 to 150
24-68
21-584
2-1/2
0 to 150
25-68
21-585
3-1/2
0 to 300
23-69
21-586
2
0 to 300
24-69
21-587
2-1/2
0 to 300
25-69
21-588
3-1/2
Specifications
Air pressure
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa).
Construction
Case
Refer to Model Chart.
Lens
Clear plastic.
Gauge actuation
Bronze Bourdon tube through sturdy brass gears.
Gauge dimensions
A251-1
2-29/32 (74 mm) dia. x 2-1/2 (64 mm) D in.
A252
4 (102 mm) dia. x 2-1/2 (64 mm) D in.
A252-12
2-15/64 (57 mm) dia. x 1-53/64 (46 mm) D in.
3
A25x Series
Typical Applications
A25x
Receiver Gauge
M
S
M
Branch Air to
Control Device
N100-0010
B
M
S
R
C
Temperature
Transmitter
3-15 psig
P541
Receiver Controller
Figure 1 Typical Application.
Notes:
Receiver-Gauges may be connected at any point in the line between the transmitter and the receiver-controller (i.e., on
either side of the restrictor-tee). More than one receiver-gauge may be connected to the same line if required.
4
AE-6xx, N100 Series
AE-6xx,
N100
Series
Control Cabinets
Control cabinets for mounting of electric,
electronic, and pneumatic controls.
Features:
• A variety of control cabinets enables selection of the best
unit to suit the application.
• N100-9901 cabinet mounts up to 16 PNEUMODULAR®
components.
• Also see PNEUMODULAR® Control Panels (PCP) on
page 187.
AE-629
N100-9901
AE-662-501
AE-662-502
AE-662-503
AE-630
AE-631
AE-632
Model Chart
Door
Model No.
Type
Opening
Steel
Gage
AE-629
AE-630
Single,
continuously
hinged
Right or
left-handed
18
Double,
continuously
hinged
Right and
left-handed
16
AE-662-502
Single,
three hinges
Left-handed
14
N100-9901
Removable,
reversible
Right or
left-handed
16
Dimensions
WxHxD
in. (mm)
AE-630-101 or
obtain locally
16 x 24 x 7
(406 x 610 x 178)
Beige paint
For 3/4 in. conduit, two on
each side
Obtain locally, one
or two subpanels
may be used
16 gage, solid,
flanged 23.075W x
28.325
None, mounting
studs for subpanel
not provided
AE-662-503
Knockouts
24 x 16 x 7
(610 x 406 x 178)
16 gage, perforated
for #8 Type A sheet
metal screws,
flanged 23.075W x
28.325L
AE-662-501
Finish
AE-631-100 or
Obtain Locally
AE-631-101 or
Obtain Locally
AE-631
AE-632
Subpanel
16 gage, holes on
2 in. centers
horizontally and
vertically 21.5W x
29.5L
24 x 32 x 7
(610 x 813 x 178)
42 x 36 x 7
(1067 x 914 x 178)
Five on top and bottom,
six on each side for 3/4 in.
or 1 in. conduit. Eight
White paint 3/8 in. dia. on top and
bottom, ten on each side
for 3/8 bulkhead barbed
pneumatic fittings.
24 x 30 x 7-1/2
(610 x 762 x 191)
Brown paint Top, bottom and sides
24 x 32 x 8
(610 x 813 x 203)
5
AE-6xx, N100 Series
Model Chart (Continued)
Model No.
Description
Dimensions
WxH
in. (mm)
AE-630-101
Subpanel for AE-629 and AE-630, 16 gage, perforated for #8 Type A sheet metal screws, flanged
14-1/2 x 20
(368 x 508)
AE-631-101
Subpanel for AE-631, 16 gage, perforated for #8 Type A sheet metal screws, flanged
22-1/2 x 28
(572 x 711)
Specifications
Construction
Doors
Locking type, supplied with keys, rigidly supported. The doors are easily removed for protection on
job site installation or mounting of components. Refer to Description Model Chart.
Steel Gage
Refer to Description Model Chart and N100-9901 Subpanels (T10) Model Chart.
Knockouts
Aligned so that a short nipple may be used to couple the panels. Refer to Description Model Chart.
Appearance
Refer to Description Model Chart.
Locations
NEMA Type 1.
Mounting
Four extruded mounting holes 1/4 in. (6mm).
Dimensions
Refer to Description Model Chart and N100-9901 Subpanels (T10) Model Chart.
6
AK-42309-500
AK-42309500
Positive Positioning Relay
Positive positioner pneumatic relay is used to
accurately position an actuator stroke with respect
to signal pressure from the controller. It can also
be used to change the effective spring range of an
actuator and increase the capacity of a controller.
Features:
For accurate positioning of valve and damper actuators, this
positioner utilizes a pilot-operated, relay-type
position-sensing mechanism, much more sensitive to
actuator position changes than some competitive
“force-balance” positioners.
Model Chart
Model No.
AK-42309-500
a
a
Description
Positive Positioning Relay with Mounting Linkage.
AK-42309-500 positive positioner cannot be used with M556, M572, M573, M574, and MK-12000 Series actuators. Use N800-0555 positioner with M556,
M573, and M574.
Specifications
Action
Direct (increase in output pressure to actuator with an increase in pilot pressure from controller).
Pilot input
0 to main air pressure, psig.
Output
0 to main air pressure, psig.
Construction
Housing
Polysulfone.
Diaphragm
Neoprene.
Start point
Adjustable 1 to 12 psig (7 to 83 kPa).
Span
Adjustable 2 to 13 psi (14 to 90 kPa); factory set at 5 psig.
Stroke
Adjustable 2 to 13 psi (14 to 90 kPa); factory set at 5 psig with feedback spring for 7/16 to 5 in. stroke.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (refer. EN-123).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Nominal supply
15 to 20 psig (103 to 138 kPa).
Environment
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping: -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
Operating: 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
Humidity
5 to 95% R.H., non-condensing.
Locations
NEMA Type 1.
Air connection code
Refer to Figure 1.
Air connections
“M” and “B”
Barbed for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
“P”
Dual-contoured for 1/4 in. O.D. and 5/32 in. O.D. tubing.
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
19 scim(5.2 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa) supply.
Air capacity for sizing air mains
20 scim (5.5 mL/s).
Flow capacity
860 scim (235 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa) supply.
Mounting linkage
All necessary linkage provided to assemble AK-42309-500 to MK-2690-0-0-1 actuator and the
following actuator series; MK-3000, MK-4400, MK-4600-0-01, MK-4700, MK-4800, MK-6600,
MK-6800, MK-6900, MK-7100, MK-8800 and MK-8900.
Dimensions
2-1/2 H x 4-1/2 W x 3 D in. (64 x 114 x 76 mm).
7
AK-42309-500
Accessories
Model No.
TOOL-095-1
PKG-1089
Description
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Spring and feedback arm kit for AK-42309-500 (included with AK-42309-500).
Typical Applications
AK-42309-500
Output to
Actuator
B
Pilot from
Controller
P
M
M
Figure 1 Piping Connections.
8
AK-52101
AK-52101
Differential Logic Module Relay
Pneumatic differential logic module relay typically
used for comparison of outdoor and return air
enthalpy transmitters to position the outdoor and
return air dampers, providing energy conservation,
when the outdoor air enthalpy is higher than the
return air enthalpy.
Features:
Compares two pneumatic signals; provides a high-gain
pneumatic output pressure change based on the input signal
comparison.
Model Chart
Model No.
AK-52101
Input Pressures
Output Pressure
“1” equal or less than input “2”
Less than 3 psig (21 kPa).
“1” greater than input “2”
Greater than 13 psig (90 kPa) when supply to port “M” is 15 psig (103 kPa) or higher.
Max. output, supply at port “M”.
Specifications
Output pressure vs. input pressures Refer to Model Chart.
Construction
Housing
Base, zinc plated steel; cover, aluminum.
Relay diaphragm
Neoprene coated, continuous fabric.
Bias adjustment
Compensation for transmitter input and system variations.
Air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient limits
Shipping temperatures
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C).
Operating temperatures
40 to 150°F (4 to 65°C).
Humidity
0 to 98% RH, non-condensing.
Air connection code
Refer to Figure 1.
Air connections
Barbed for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
41.5 scim(11.3 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa). When supplied by a controller 0 scim (0 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
48 scim (13.2 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa) supply.
Mounting
Panel or wall, three mounting holes are provided for No. 8 or No. 10 screws.
Dimensions
6 H x 3-3/8 W x 3-1/16 D in. (152 x 86 x 78 mm).
9
AK-52101
Typical Applications
Input Input
2
M
Output
M
B
1
AK-52101
Figure 1 Piping Connections.
HKS-8065
Enthalpy Transmitter
Outdoor Air
2
M
M
AT-532-111-1-01
HKS-8065
Enthalpy Transmitter
Return Air
Output of
Mixed Air
2
Controller
1
AT-532-111-1-01
1
2
Output of Logic
Module
3
M
AK-52101
Logic Module
1 Relay Type or 20 psig Supply Air.
2 When temperature transmitters are used, the transmitters should
be of the same range and span.
3
Output of Logic Module to Signal (S) port of: S511-5 or S511-10
Minimum-Position Switch; R504 Series Diverting/Switching Relay
(snap-acting); or damper actuators - depending on desired
sequence of operation.
Figure 2 Typical Enthalpy Comparison System.
10
B
AKR-40605
AKR40605
Limiting, 1:1 Ratio Relay and Scale Plates
10
Pneumatic 1:1 ratio direct acting relay is used to
limit minimum or maximum output pressure. The
AKR-40605 can also be used as a manual
positioner, 1:1 ratio relay, or lowest of two
pressures selector. Relay will also increase the
capacity of a controller (except when used as
maximum output limiter or lowest pressure
selector).
20
AKR-40605
AKR-40605
Shown with AK-53098
Scale Plate and Knob
Model Chart
Air Connection Code
Model No.
Description
Output
Port P
AKR-40605
a
Minimum output limiting
Minimum output adjustable 0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa)
Maximum output limiting
Maximum output adjustable 0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa)
Manual positioner
Manually selected from 0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa)
1:1 Ratio relay
0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa)
Pilot
Lowest pressure selector
Lowest of two pressures 0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa)
Input
Port Ba
Port M
Pilot
Main
Open to
atmosphere
Input
Output
Main
Input
Output pressure will drop to 0 when main air supply is reduced to 0. The reduced air pressure allows controlled device(s) to return to an ensured safe
condition when main air pressure to the AKR-40605 is relieved.
Specifications
Action
1:1 direct.
Output
Refer to Model Chart.
Construction
Housing
Polysulfone.
Diaphragm
Neoprene.
Adjustments
Refer to Model Chart for outputs.
Air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Nominal supply
15 to 25 psig (103 to 138 kPa).
Ambient limits
Shipping and storage
-40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
Operating
32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
Humidity
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Air connection code
Refer to Model Chart.
Air connections
Barbed for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
3.5 scim (0.9 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
16 scim (4.4 mL/s).
Mounting
Panel, wall or in-line; mounting plate and two push-in fasteners for perforated metal subpanel
provided.
Panel space required
4 H x 2-7/16 W x 1-3/4 D in. (102 x 62 x 44 mm).
11
AKR-40605
Accessories
Model No.
AK-53098
AK-53198
AK-53298
AK-53398
AK-53498
AK-53598
AK-53698
AK-53798
Description (Scale Plate and Knob Kits)
0 to 20 psig.
% Min. Outdoor Air (O.A.).
“Increase” CW.
“Increase” CCW.
“Close” CW.
“Close” CCW.
“Warmer” CW.
“Warmer” CCW.
Typical Applications
Pilot Signal
(input)
B
Output
M
M
P
AKR-40605
Minimum Output Limiting Application Shown
Figure 1 Piping Connections.
12
AKS-1100
AKS-1100
Receiver Controller Setpoint Adjuster and Scale Plates
Setpoint adjuster and scale plates used to provide
remote setpoint adjustment of RKS-2001, RKS4002, and RKSR-4000 receiver-controllers. May
also be used to manually pilot pneumatic relays.
Features:
• Allows the setpoint of a pneumatic receiver-controller to be
raised or lowered from a location up to 1000 ft. (305 m)
from the receiver-controller.
• Series available to work with various transmitter ranges.
• A receiver gauge, mounted near the setpoint adjuster
shows the actual result of remotely adjusting the receivercontroller’s setpoint.
AKS-1100 with Scale Plate
Model Chart
Model No.
AKS-1100
Description
Remote setpoint adjuster.
Specifications
Construction
Aluminum housing, precision flapper-nozzle assembly.
Output
Linear 3 to 15 psig (21 to 102 kPa).
Air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient limits
Shipping temperatures
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C).
Operating temperatures
40 to 120°F (4 to 49°C).
Humidity
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Air connection
Barbed connection for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
48 scim (13.1 mL/s).
Mounting
Panel or wall box. Panel requires 5/8 in. (16 mm) hole for mounting the remote setpoint adjuster.
Panel space required
2-3/8 H x 2-1/4 W x 2-1/2 D in. (60 x 57 x 63 mm).
AKS-11xx scale plates (must be
ordered separately)
White letters on black background, keyed for proper locating on setpoint adjuster.
13
AKS-1100
Accessory Scale Plates (must be ordered separately).
Model No.
Description
For Use with the Following Transmitters
±5°F Scale
AKS-1129
TKS-5001, TKS-6001, T150-1062, T150-1073
AKS-1130
Closed  Open
AKS-1131
Open  Closed
AKS-1149
±5.5°C Scale
T150-1011, -1012, -1013, -1021, -1022, -1023, -1082, -1083
AKS-1169
±20°F Scale
T150-1031, T150-1035
AKS-1189
±8% R.H. Scale
HKS-2033, -5033
AKS-1199
±2 in. Water Scale
HKS-2033, -5033
Actuators
Typical Applications
M
N100-0010
AKS-1100
B
M
2
1
A
RKS-3002
RKS-4002, RKSR-4000
Receiver Controller
1
Shown with Internal Restrictor.
B
M
2
1
AKS-1100
A
RKS-3002
RKS-4002, RKSR-4000
Receiver Controller
2 Shown With External Restrictor.
Figure 1 Typical Setpoint Adjuster Application.
NOTES: These apply to all receiver-controllers:
1. When internal restrictor is used, AKS-1100 must be located within 200 ft. (61 m) of receiver-controller.
2. When external restrictor is used, AKS-1100 must be located within 1000 ft. (305 m) of receiver-controller, and the
restrictor must be located within 200 ft. (61 m) of the transmitter (preferably at the transmitter’s location). Remove
internal restrictor from receiver-controller and install blocking gasket.
14
AL-15x Series
AL-15x
Series
Solenoid Air Valve
For applications where an electrical circuit is used
to control a pneumatically operated device. Used to
direct supply air to a pneumatic device when the
coil is energized or de-energized depending on the
supply and exhaust air connections. May be used
for selection or diverting applications.
Features:
• High capacity of AL-15x Series allows operation of more
devices.
• Brass body receives 1/8 in. male NPT fittings for simple
connections to either polyethylene or copper tubing.
• All popular voltages from 24V to 480V available for
maximum application flexibility.
• Includes mounting bracket.
• When a 1/8 in. fitting is installed, it secures the body of the
valve to the mounting bracket.
Model Chart
Voltage
(AC 60 Hz)
Model No.
AL-150
24
AL-151
120
AL-152
208
AL-153
240
AL-155
480
Specifications
Valve inputs
Power input
9.1 Watts (energized).
Available voltages
Refer to Model Chart.
Electrical connections
18 in. (457 mm) leads on the coil. Threaded hole for 1/2 in. conduit.
Maximum inlet air pressure
40 psig (276 kPa). Clean, dry, oil free air is required (reference EN-123).
Air connections
1/8 in. NPT.
N.C.: Normally closed, Port 2.
N.O.: Normally open, Port 3.
COM: Common, Port 1.
Valve outputs
Flow capacity
1988 scim (543 mL/s) at 15 psig (138 kPa) supply with 1 psig (6.9 kPa) drop.
Environment
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C).
Operating: 32 to 125°F (0 to 52°C).
Supply air: 40 to 130°F (4 to 54°C).
Humidity
50 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Location
NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, and 4X.
Dimensions
3-5/32 H x 2-3/4 W x 2 D in. (80 x 70 x 51 mm).
15
AL-15x Series
Typical Applications
Typical Schematic Diagram
Motor Starter
L1 L2 L3
X1
A
H
O
C
Red Leads
Green Lead
AL-150
Bottom View
(N.O.)
Port 2
N.C.
M
20
Port 3
N.O.
Port 1
Common
120V
H G
M
Supply
Fan Motor
Humidifier
Fan
PE
1
Room Humidistat
(R.A.)
H1
M
B
MB
Exhaust
M1
B
M
S
To N.C. Steam
Humidifier
Outside Air
Damper (N.C.)
8-13 psi (Typical)
Branch (output) of mixed
air temperature controller
To Return (M2)
Damper (N.O.)
Positioner
To Relief (M3)
Damper (N.C.)
8-13 psi
M4
Figure 1 Typical Application Wiring Diagram.
(Air-Handling Unit Application)
16
Exhaust Damper
AL-161-4
AL-161-4
Air Switching Valve
Three-way air switching valve is used for central
supply air changeover in dual pressure systems.
Features:
Compact size; large air capacity.
Model Chart
Flow Pattern
Model No.
AL-161-4
a
Stem Up [No Air to Actuator]
Stem Down [20 psig (138 kPa) Air to Actuator]
Flow
Closed Port
Flow
Closed Port
B to ABa
A
A to AB a
B
AB Common.
Specifications
Construction
Body
Bronze.
Actuator
Die cast aluminum with replaceable neoprene diaphragm.
Body rating
250 psig (1724 kPa).
Maximum air pressure (actuator)
30 psig (207 kPa).
Spring range
8 to 13 psig (55 to 90 kPa).
Flow capacity
25,920 scim (7,080 mL/s) at 15 psig (103 kPa) supply with 1 psig (6.9 kPa) drop.
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping and storage
-40 to 220°F (-40 to 104°C).
Operating
40 to 130°F (4 to 54°C).
Supply air
Port code and flow pattern
40 to 130°F (4 to 54°C).
Refer to Model Chart.
Connections
Actuator
1/8 in. FNPT.
Valve body
1/2 in. FNPT.
Mounting
In any position to wall or subpanel of a cabinet with factory assembled mounting bracket.
Dimensions
6-1/4 H x 3 W x 2-13/16 D in. (159 x 76 x 71 mm).
17
AL-161-4
Typical Applications
Electric Time
Switch
L1
L2
AL-1xx
Solenoid Air Valve
(E/P Relay)
M
N.C. C
N.O.
15 psi
(103 kPa)
AL-161-4
A
AB
B
20 psi
(138 kPa)
Figure 1 Typical Application.
18
Pressure
Gauge
0-30 psig
Supply Main to
Thermostats
AL-17x Series, AL-18x Series
AL-17x
Series,
AL-18x
Series
Solenoid Air Valves
For applications where an electrical circuit is used
to control a pneumatically-operated device. Used
to direct supply air to a pneumatic device when the
coil is energized or de-energized, depending on the
supply and exhaust air connects.
Features:
• Open frame or junction box construction accommodates a
wide variety of NEMA 1 mounting locations.
• Available in 24, 120, 208, 240, or 480 Vac models.
• Supplied with 18 in. electrical leads for ease of installation.
• Corrosion-resistant plastic body.
• Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
AL-18x
AL-17x
Model Chart
Model No.
Open Frame
J-Box
Voltage
(AC 60 Hz)
Replacement Coil Part Numbers
AL-170
AL-180
24
PNR-325-024
AL-171
AL-181
120
PNR-325-120
N/A
AL-181-201a
120
PNR-325-120
N/A
AL-182
208
—
N/A
AL-183
240
—
N/A
AL-185
480
PNR-325-480
a
with wire harness.
Specifications
Valve inputs
Power input
5.7 Watts (energized).
17.3 VA Inrush.
9.2 VA Holding.
Voltage
For available voltages, refer to Model Chart.
Electrical connections
18 in. (457 mm) leads on the coil.
Maximum inlet air pressure
30 psig (207 kPa). Clean, dry, oil free air is required (reference EN-123).
Air connections
Three plastic ferrules included for plastic 1/4 in. tubing (PKG-1141).
N.C., Normally closed, Port 1.
N.O., Normally open, Port 2.
COM, Common, Port 3.
Valve outputs
Flow capacity
519 scim (142 mL/sec) at 15 psig (103 kPa) supply with 1 psig (6.9 kPa) drop.
Environment
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C).
Operating: 40 to 130°F (4 to 54°C).
Supply air: 40 to 130°F (4 to 54°C).
Humidity
50 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Location
NEMA Type 1.
Mounting
Vertical with solenoid at top (as shown).
Dimensions
AL-17x
3-5/16 H x 1-9/16 W x 1-7/32 D in. (84 x 40 x 31 mm).
AL-18x
3-3/4 H x 3-13/16 W x 1-3/8 D in. (95 x 97 x 35 mm).
19
AL-17x Series, AL-18x Series
Typical Applications
AL-170
Solenoid Air Valve
Fan Power
Supply
M
N.C.
1
2 N.O. Exhaust
3
C
Damper
Actuator
Exhaust Air
from Building
Exhaust Fan
To Outdoors
Damper (NC)
(opens when fan runs)
Figure 1 Typical Application Diagram.
20
AL-19x Series
AL-19x
Series
Solenoid Air Valve
For applications where an electrical circuit is used
to control a pneumatically operated device. Used to
direct supply or control air to pneumatic devices
when the coil is either energized or de-energized,
depending on the supply and exhaust air
connections.
Features:
• Plastic corrosion-resistant body provides long life.
• Mounting bracket and fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing
supplied with valve for simple, quick installation.
• High capacity of AL-19x Series allows more devices to be
used with fewer solenoid air valves.
• All popular voltages from 24V to 480V available for
maximum application flexibility.
• Large capacity solenoid air valves (E/P relays).
Model Chart
Model No.
Voltage (AC 60 Hz) +10/-15%
AL-190
24
AL-191
120
AL-192
208
AL-193
240
AL-195
480
Specifications
Valve inputs
Power input
9.1 Watts (energized).
Available voltages
Refer to Model Chart.
Electrical connections
18 in. (457 mm) leads on the coil. Coil leads are red; ground lead is green. Threaded hole for 1/2 in.
conduit connector. Accepts 1/2 in. EMT fittings.
Maximum inlet air pressure
30 psig (345 kPa). Clean, dry, oil free air is required (reference EN-123).
Air connections
For 1/4 in. compression fittings. Three compression fittings (PKG-1141) for 1/4 in. plastic tubing
supplied with each valve.
N.C., Normally closed, Port 2.
N.O., Normally open, Port 3.
COM, Common, Port 1.
Valve outputs
Flow capacity
1020 scim (278 mL/sec) at 15 psig (103 kPa) supply with 1 psig (6.9 kPa) drop.
Environment
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C).
Operating: 32 to 130°F (0 to 54°C).
Supply air: 40 to 130°F (4 to 54°C).
Humidity
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Location
NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, and 4X.
Dimensions
4-5/16 H x 3-7/16 W x 1-5/8 D in. (110 x 87 x 43 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AL-196
PKG-1141
Description
Compression fitting for 1/4 in. metal tubing (18 per package).
Compression fitting for 1/4 in. plastic tubing.
21
AL-19x Series
Typical Applications
Typical Schematic Diagram
Motor Starter
L1 L2 L3
X1
A
H
O
C
Red Leads
AL-191
(120 V)
Green Lead
120V
H G
(N.O.)
Port 2
N.C.
Port 3
N.O.
M
Exhaust
Supply
Fan Motor
Humidifier
Fan
PE
1
Room Humidistat
(R.A.)
H1
M
B
MB
M1
Port 1
Common
M
B
M
S
Branch (output) of mixed
air temperature controller
To N.C. Steam
Humidifier
Outside Air
Damper (N.C.)
8-13 psi (Typical)
To Return (M2)
Damper (N.O.)
Positioner
To Relief (M3)
Damper (N.C.)
8-13 psi
M4
Figure 1 Typical Application Wiring Diagram.
(Air-Handling Unit Application)
22
Exhaust Damper
AL-3xx Series
AL-3xx
Series
Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges for continuous indication of air
pressure in pneumatic control systems.
Features:
• Permits readout of main air pressure and/or output
pressures of pneumatic control components.
• 0 to 100 (0 to 700 kPa) and 0 to 30 psig (0 to 200 kPa or 0
to 210 kPa) models available.
• Available in flush-mounted or stem-mounted models.
0
AL-323 Shown
Model Chart
Model No.
Mounting
AL-322
Back connection
AL-323
Panel (flush)
AL-327
Back connection
Range
Dial Diameter
in. (mm)
psig (kPa)a
2 (51)
0 to 30 (0 to 210)
0 to 30 (0 to 200)
0 to 100 (0 to 689)
AL-353
Panel (flush)
3-1/2 (89)
0 to 30 (0 to 210)
AL-362
Back connection
1-1/2 (38)
0 to 30 (0 to 200)
a
Gauges are dual scaled.
Specifications
Air pressure
Refer to Model Chart.
Accuracy
Within 2% of total scale range in middle half of scale and 3% elsewhere.
Construction
Case
Rust resistant steel.
Dial scale
Numerical intervals
5 and 10 psi (30, 50 and 100 kPa).
Graduation marks
1 psi (5 or 10 kPa) for 0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa or 0 to 210 kPa) and 2 psi (20 kPa) for 0 to 100
(0 to 700 kPa).
Ambient limits
Shipping temperatures
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C).
Operating temperatures
-20 to 150°F (-29 to 65°C).
Humidity
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Air connections
Back connection 1/8 in. MNPT.
Flush panel mounting
AL-323, 2-1/8 in. (54 mm) dia. hole required; AL-353, 3-3/4 in. (95 mm) dia. hole required.
Dial dimensions
Refer to Model Chart.
23
AL-7xxx Series
AL-7xxx
Series
Unit Ventilator Sub-Panels
Pneumatic unit ventilator sub-panels provide
plug-in wiring of the various controls.
Features:
• Several different sub-panel assemblies, for use with
unit-ventilators, provide standardized plug-in wiring of:
- P.E. switches.
- Electrical low-limit thermostats with manual or automaticreset.
- Solenoid air valve (E.P. Relay).
AL-7121
Model Chart
Quantity of Items on Sub-Panel
PC-151
P.E. Switch
(DPDT)
TC-5231
Low Temp.
Thermostat
Automatic Reset
TC-5241
Low Temp.
Thermostat
Manual Reset
Solenoid
Air Valve
AL-7111
1


1
AL-7112
1
1

1
AL-7115
1

1
1
AL-7121



1
Model No.
Specifications
Typical Controls
Pressure electric switches, solenoid air valves and low temperature thermostats.
Panel Dimensions
9-7/8 L x 6-7/8 W in. (251 x 175 mm).
Note: Height is determined by the controls mounted to the panel.
Accessories
Model No.
TOOL-095-1
24
Description
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)
C Series, Thermostat Covers
CT Series
(21 and
22 Series) These thermostat covers are designed for use with
2 x 2 in. pneumatic controls only. All covers are
supplied with a concealed setpoint adjustment
cover (factory installed on the -403, -404, and -407
models).
5
0
The CTR-xx universal replacement cover kit
includes a factory assembled standard cover with
°F thermometer, setpoint, and three inserts for field
configuration (Barber-Colman only).
Blank Cover with Internal Thermometer and
Concealed Adjustment
60
70
0
8
6
0
Features:
• Small size: approximately 2 x 2 in. (51 x 51 mm).
• Clean, attractive appearance.
• Metal and ABS plastic models available.
• Designed to allow room air to move easily over sensing
element.
• Concealed or exposed adjustment, thermometer, and
setpoint.
70
80
Full Cover
with External Thermometer
and Exposed Adjustment
Full Cover (Visible Setpoint)
with Internal Thermometer and
Concealed Adjustment
25
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)
Model Chart
Invensys Thermostat Covers with Robertshaw Logo.
Cover Model
No.
Cover Type
Dial Markings
Full
Blank
C1-42
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
C1-43
X
—
Brushed aluminum
X
—
Gray
C1-47
X
—
Beige
C3-42
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
C3-43
X
—
Brushed aluminum
X
—
Gray
C3-47
X
—
Beige
C4-42
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
C4-43
X
—
Brushed aluminum
X
—
Gray
C4-47
X
—
Beige
C5-42
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
C5-46
X
—
Gray
C5-47
X
—
Beige
C1-46
C3-46
C4-46
C6-42
55 to 85°F
55 to 85°F
55 to 85°F
Cooler-Warmer
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
C6-43
X
—
Brushed aluminum
C6-46
X
—
Gray
C6-47
X
—
Beige
C11-42
C11-43
C11-46
Satin-chrome paint
None (Concealed
Adjustment)
Thermometer
only, concealed
adjustment
C11-47
26
Color
Brushed aluminum
Gray
Beige
Adjustment
Thermometer
Exposed
None
Exposed
External
Concealed
External
Material
Metal
Plastic
Metal
Plastic
Metal
Plastic
Metal
None
Plastic
Metal
Exposed
External
Plastic
Metal
Concealed
External
Plastic
C3X62
10 to 30°C
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Exposed
External
C4X62
10 to 30°C (Concealed
Adjustment)
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Concealed
External
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)
Thermostats for use with Robertshaw Logo Thermostat Covers.
Cover Model No.
T12
T13
T18
T19
T23
T24
T27
T32
T33
T34
T35
T36
C1-42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C1-43
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C1-46
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C1-47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C3-42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C3-43
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C3-46
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C3-47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C4-42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C4-43
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C4-46
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C4-47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C5-42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C5-46
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C5-47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C6-42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C6-43
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C6-46
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C6-47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C11-42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C11-43
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C11-46
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C11-47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C3X62
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C4X62
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
27
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)
Invensys Wholesale Thermostat Covers with Robertshaw Logo.
Cover
Model No.
Cover Type
Dial Markings
21-923
22-923
55 to 85°F
22-823
21-928
22-928
None (No company
identification)
22-828
21-933
22-933
55 to 85°F
22-833
21-939
22-939
55 to 85°F
22-839
21-943
21-943
Adjustment Thermometer
Full
Blank
Color
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
X
—
Gray
X
—
Beige
—
X
Satin-chrome paint
—
X
Gray
—
X
Beige
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
X
—
Gray
X
—
Beige
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
X
—
Gray
X
—
Beige
Material
Metal
Plastic
Exposed
None
Concealed
None
Exposed
External
Concealed
External
Metal
Plastic
Metal
Plastic
Metal
Plastic
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Cooler-Warmer
X
—
Gray
Plastic
Exposed
None
Cooler-Warmer (Marks
for 55 to 85°F)
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Exposed
External
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Concealed
External
Concealed
Internal
Exposed
External
22-843
21-948
21-957
22-957
None
Thermometer only,
concealed adjustment
22-857
21-960
22-960
Beige
None
2890-010a
2890-011 a
2890-012 a
a
28
Gray
55 to 85°F or blank
Plastic
—
X
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
—
X
Gray
Plastic
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
X
—
Gray
X
—
Euro-white
Includes a 21-933 full dial, a blank face plate, and 21-800 setpoint adjustment cover.
Plastic
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)
Thermostats for use with Wholesale Robershaw Logo Thermostat Covers.
Cover Model No.
T12
T13
T18
T19
T23
T24
T27
T32
T33
T34
T35
T36
21-923
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-923
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-823
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
21-928
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-928
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-828
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
21-933
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-933
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-833
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
21-939
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-939
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-839
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
21-943
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
21-948
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-943
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
22-843
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
21-957
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22-957
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22-857
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
21-960
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
a
22-960
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
2890-010a
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
2890-011 a
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
2890-012 a
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
Includes a 21-933 full dial, a blank face plate, and 21-800 setpoint adjustment cover.
29
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)
Invensys Thermostat Covers with Barber-Colman Logo.
Cover
Model No.
Cover Type
Dial Markings
CT-21-400
CT-12-400
55 to 85°F
CT-11-400
CT-21-000
CT-12-000
55 to 85°F
CT-11-000
CT-21-421
CT-21-420
Cooler-Warmer
Cooler-Warmer
CT-12-403
CT-11-403
CT-21-407
CT-12-407
None
CT-11-407
CT-21-404
CT-12-404
None
CT-11-404
CT-21-116
10 to 30°C
Exposed
(Adjustment
cover shipped
loose)
None
Exposed
(Adjustment
cover shipped
loose)
External
Metal
Exposed
(Adjustment
cover shipped
loose)
None
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Exposed
(Adjustment
cover shipped
loose)
External
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Concealed
External
Concealed
Internal
Concealed
None
Exposed
(Adjustment
cover shipped
loose)
External
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
X
—
Gray
X
—
Beige
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
X
—
Gray
X
—
Beige
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
—
Thermometer
only, concealed
adjustment
None
Thermometer
Blank
X
CT-21-403
Adjustment
Full
Color
Metal
Plastic
Gray
Plastic
Beige
X
Satin-chrome paint
—
X
Gray
—
X
Beige
—
X
Satin-chrome paint
—
X
Gray
—
X
Beige
—
Metal
Plastic
—
X
Material
Metal
Plastic
Metal
Plastic
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Thermostats for use with Barber-Colman Logo Thermostat Covers.
Cover Model No.
T12
T13
T18
T19
T23
T24
T27
T32
T33
T34
T35
T36
CT-21-400
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
CT-12-400
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
CT-11-400
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
CT-21-000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
CT-12-000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
CT-11-000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
CT-21-421
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
CT-21-420
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
CT-21-403
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CT-12-403
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CT-11-403
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CT-21-407
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
CT-12-407
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
CT-11-407
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
CT-21-404
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CT-12-404
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CT-11-404
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CT-21-116
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
30
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)
Invensys Blank Thermostat Covers (No Logo)
Cover
Model No.
Cover Type
Dial Markings
Full
Blank
C2-42
—
X
Satin-chrome paint
C2-43
—
X
Brushed aluminum
—
X
Gray
None
C2-46
X
Beige
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
X
—
Gray
Plastic
Metal
Cooler-Warmer
C14-42
C14-43
None
C14-46
C14-47
a
Concealed
None
Exposed
None
Exposed
None
Concealed
Internal
Plastic
—
C13-42
Thermometer
Metal
C2-47
20 to 90% RH
Adjustment
Material
C10-42
C10-46
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
—
X
Satin-chrome paint
—
X
Brushed aluminum
—
X
Gray
—
X
Beige
Metal
Plastic
None
—
X
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Exposed
None
C3X42
10 to 30oC
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Exposed
External
C4X42
10 to 30oC
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Concealed
External
C6X42
Cooler-Warmer (marks
for 10 to 30oC)
X
—
Satin-chrome paint
Metal
Exposed
External
C15-42
a
Color
C15 has special holes for exhaust air for H53 or can be used as blank cover for H18.
Thermostats for use with Blank Thermostat Covers (No Logo).
Cover Model
No.
T12
T13
T18
T19
T23
T24
T27
T32
T33
T34
T35
T36
H18
H53
T46x
C2-42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C2-43
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C2-46
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
a
C2-47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
C10-42
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
C10-46
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
C13-42
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
C14-42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
C14-43
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
C14-46
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
C14-47
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
C15-42
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
—
C3X42a
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
C4X42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
C6X42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
C15 has special holes for exhaust air for H53 or can be used as blank cover for H18.
Accessories
Model No.
N2-4
Wholesale Model No.
21-881
Description
1/16 in. hexhead wrench for thermostat calibration (also for calibration of P341-, P541 and P541-RA
Receiver-Controllers.
31
H18-301 (2230-018)
H18-301
(2230-01
8)
Room Humidistat
The pneumatic room humidistat is a
proportioning-type device designed to control
pneumatic valves or damper actuators associated
with heating or cooling coils, humidifiers, air
washers, or other humidifying or dehumidifying
equipment to maintain constant relative humidity.
This device uses a highly sensitive hygroscopic
nylon ribbon and a pilot bleed relay with pneumatic
feedback. Throttling range, action (direct or
reverse), and setpoint are easily adjusted by
graduated dials. Internal limit stops are available to
restrict adjustment range when required.
20
50
9
0
Features:
• Attractive appearance (various metal or ABS plastic covers
available).
• Factory calibrated. S.S. ball-in-seat provides pneumatic
feedback for linear, stable operation.
• Leakproof, O-Ring-sealed, spring-loaded self-closing
branch gauge tap.
• Easy manual changeover from reverse to direct action, and
vice versa.
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale Model No.
H18-301
a
2230-018
a
Description
Refer to Specifications.
Includes cover, (2) 1/4” x 3/16” reducers, 6” piece of plastic tubing, mounting plate, and wall plate.
Specifications
Action
Proportional: factory set for reverse action, adjustable for direct action.
Setpoint range
20 to 90% RH.
Throttling range
5 to 15%/12 psi adjustable, factory set 10%.
Construction
Element
Hygroscopic nylon.
Components
Die cast aluminum, stainless steel, and glass-filled nylon.
Diaphragms
Fabric-reinforced neoprene.
Air filter
Internal.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Refer to EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Minimum
16 psig (110 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
For spring-reinforced 3/16 in. plastic tubing and required fittings (order separately).
Calibration point
9 psig branch line pressure when ambient humidity equals setpoint.
Setpoint adjustment
Serrated thumb wheel. May be concealed with 10-72 adjustment cover (order separately).
Cover
Included with Humidistat.
Scale
20 to 90%.
Finish
Satin chrome painted aluminum.
Air consumption
32
17 scim (4.6 mL/s); 19 scim (RA) (5.2 mL/s).
H18-301 (2230-018)
Specifications (Continued)
Mounting
Upright position on wall.
Dimensions
2-1/32 H x 2-1/32 W x 1-3/8 D in. (52 x 52 x 35 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
6-371
10-50
10-53
10-57
10-58
10-59
10-62
10-63
10-64
10-66
10-72
10-73
10-76
10-77
10-78
10-80
10-82
10-82-SS
10-82-47
10-82-48
C10-42
C10-46
C15-42
MCS-GA
N2-4
N5-49
N5-50
N5-52
N5-53
N5-95
Wholesale Model No.
20-642
20-705
20-707
20-710
20-711
20-712
20-715
20-716

21-468
21-800
21-473
21-876
20-714


20-850



21-955


22-138
20-881
21-065
21-067
21-068
21-069

Description
Mounting ring (use with mounting heads).
Wall Plate.
Metal thermostat guard.
Mortar joint fitting, two tube, copper.
Mounting ring (use with N5-52).
Internal stop kit.
Thermostat guard, clear Lexan.
Insulating backplate, for plastic guards.
Tubing assembly with eyelets and fittings.
Mortar joint fitting, two “FR” tubes.
Concealed adjustment cover (black), for metal covers.
Drywall mounting fitting (snap-in).
Thermostat guard, opaque ABS.
Adaptor plate.
Insulating backplate.
Concealed adjustment cover, for use with gray ABS cover.
Mounting plate for 2 x 4 switch box, Black.
Stainless steel mounting plate.
Beige mounting plate.
Euro-white mounting plate.
Replacement cover. No logo.
Replacement cover. No logo.
Replacement cover. No logo.
Gauge tap adaptor.
Calibration tool for thermostats, (and P341, P541 and P541-RA).
Adaptor (for use with N5-53).
Duct mounting box.
Bracket, drywall mount (use with 10-58 mounting pin).
Bracket, stud mount rough-in.
Wall thermostat conversion kit.
Typical Applications
Wire to fan starter of air-handling 1
unit supplying air to humidified areas
EP
C
M
NC
NO
AL-1xx
E/P Relay
1
V
M B
To other
H18-301
humidistats Humidistat
R.A.
Steam
To Humidifier
Humidifier
Valve N.C.
When air-handling unit supply fan is running, EP relay
passes main air to humidistats, allowing them to
operate normally-closed humidifier steam valves.
When fan is de-energized, EP relay removes main air
from humidistats, closing humidifier valves.
Figure 1 Typical Humidistat Application.
33
H53-301 (2232-053)
H53-301
(2232-053)
Room Humidity Transmitter
Humidity Transmitter measures room humidity and
transmits a proportional pneumatic signal to a
calibrated receiver gauge and/or receiver
controller. The device is factory set to transmit a
3 to 15 psig signal over a 30 to 80% RH range.
Features:
• Highly sensitive nylon sensing element,
temperature-compensated.
• Linear response to room relative humidity changes.
• Stable, force-balance operation.
• Small size, attractive appearance.
• Shipped with specially-vented cover.
• Matches appearance of T-Series 2 x 2 in. Thermostats,
H18-301 Humidistat, and T53-101 Temperature
Transmitter.
H53-301
Model Chart
Model No.
H53-301
a
Wholesale
Model No.
2232-053a
Description
Refer to Specifications.
Includes blank cover, wall plate, (1) 1/4” x 3/16” reducer, 6” piece of plastic tubing and mounting plate.
Specifications
Action
Direct acting, proportional.
Humidity range
30 to 80% RH, non-adjustable.
Construction
Element
Hygroscopic nylon ribbon.
Components
Die cast aluminum, stainless steel, and glass-filled nylon.
Diaphragms
Fabric-reinforced neoprene.
Air filter
Internal.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (refer. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
For spring-reinforced 3/16 in. plastic tubing and required fittings (order separately).
Calibration point
Refer to Figure 1.
Cover
Blank, provided with transmitter.
Scale
None.
Finish
Satin chrome painted aluminum.
Mounting
Upright position on wall.
Dimensions
2-1/32 H x 2-1/32 W x 1-3/8 D in. (52 x 52 x 35 mm).
Air consumption
29 scim (7.9 mL/s).
34
H53-301 (2232-053)
Accessories
Model No.
6-371
10-53
10-57
10-58
10-59
10-62
10-63
10-64
10-66
10-72
10-73
10-76
10-77
10-78
10-80
10-82
10-82-SS
10-82-47
10-82-48
C15-42
MCS-GA
N2-4
N4-32
N5-49
N5-52
N5-53
N100-0010
N100-2501
Wholesale Model No.
20-642
20-707
20-710
20-711
20-712
20-715
20-716

21-468
21-800
21-473
21-876
20-714

21-964





22-138
20-881
20-944
21-065
21-068
21-069
21-038
21-153
Description
Mounting ring (use with mounting heads).
Metal thermostat guard.
Mortar joint fitting, two tube, copper.
Mounting ring (for use with N5-52).
Internal stop kit.
Thermostat guard, clear Lexan.
Insulating backplate for plastic guards.
Tubing assembly with eyelets and fittings.
Mortar joint fitting, two “FR” tubes.
Concealed adjustment cover (black), for metal covers.
Drywall mounting fitting (snap-in).
Thermostat guard, opaque ABS.
Adaptor plate.
Insulating backplate.
Concealed adjustment cover, for use with gray ABS cover.
Mounting plate for 2 x 4 switch box, black.
Stainless steel mounting plate.
Beige mounting plate.
Euro-white mounting plate.
Replacement cover. No logo.
Gauge tap adaptor.
Calibration tool for thermostats, (and P341, P541 and P541-RA).
Restrictor tee, copper tubing.
Adaptor (for use with N5-53).
Bracket, drywall mount (use with 10-58 mounting ring).
Bracket, stud mount rough-in.
0.017 scfm restrictor tee, red plastic.
In-line 0.017 scfm restrictor, red plastic.
Branch Pressure (psig)
Typical Applications
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
% Relative Humidity
Figure 1 Relative Humidity vs. Branch Pressure.
M
M
S
H53-301
Room Transmitter
30-80% RH
V
N100-0010
S
R
C
M
B
P541-RA
Receiver Controller
To Steam
Humidifier
Humidifier Valve
N.C. 8-13 psig
STM.
1 H53-301 is wall-mounted, in the room to measure
area relative humidity.
Figure 2 Typical Application H53-301 Room Transmitter.
35
H150-100 (2232-150)
H150-100
(2232-150)
Duct Relative Humidity Transmitter
The Relative Humidity Transmitter is designed to
measure relative humidity in an air duct and to
transmit a 3 to 15 psig pneumatic signal over its 0
to 100% R.H. span to remote controlling, indicating,
and alarm devices such as receiver-controllers,
receiver gauges, and sensitive pressure switches.
Features:
• Widest possible (0 to 100%) relative humidity range for 3 to
15 psig (20.7 to 103.4 kPa) output.
• Shielded, highly sensitive, temperature-compensated nylon
sensing element, designed for duct insertion.
• Force-balance pneumatic feedback for stable, repeatable
operation.
Model Chart
Model No.
H150-100
Wholesale
Model no.
2232-150
Description
Refer to Specifications.
Specifications
Control action
Direct acting, proportional.
Ambient temperature limit
140°F (60°C).
Humidity range
0 to 100% R.H.
Air pressure
Operating
20 psig (138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Construction
Element
Hygroscopic nylon tape sensing element.
Housing
Die cast aluminum.
Dimensions
Case
2-5/8 H x 2-1/16 W x 1-3/4 D in. (67 x 78 x 44 mm).
Element
1-5/16 H x 7/8 W x 5-5/8 D in. (33 x 22 x 143 mm).
Weight
0.9 lb (0.4 kg).
Air consumption
29 scim (7.9 mL/s).
Accessories
Model No.
N4-32
N100-0010
N100-2501
36
Wholesale Model No.
20-944
21-038
21-153
Description
Restrictor tee, copper tubing.
Restrictor tee, polyethylene tubing.
In-line restrictor.
H150-100 (2232-150)
Typical Applications
M
N.C. Steam Valve
8-13 psig
S
N100-0010
H150-100
Duct Humidity
Transmitter
V
M
B
M
M
S
R
M NC NO C
C
To Steam
Humidifier
STM.
S
Vac Wire to
Fan Starter
R527 Series E/P Relay
Receiver Controller
(Reverse Acting)
1 H150-100 is usually located in the return (or exhaust) air duct, to measure
space relative humidity.
2 When the air-handling unit fan motor is de-energized, the E/P relay removes
control air from the normally closed steam valve, closing it fully.
Branch Pressure (psig)
Figure 1 Typical Applications.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
% Relative Humidity
Figure 2 Relative Humidity vs. Branch Pressure.
37
HKS-2033, HKS-5033
HKS-2033,
HKS-5033
Room/Duct Humidity Transmitters
For proportional humidity control used with RKS
Series receiver-controllers. May be used with
calibrated gauges for continuous humidity
indication at any local or remote position.
Features:
HKS-2033
• 10 to 90% relative humidly range for 3 to 15 psig (20.7 to
103.4 kPa) output.
• Highly sensitive nylon sensing element, designed for duct
insertion.
• Pneumatic feedback for stable, repeatable operation.
HKS-2033
HKS-5033
HKS-5033
• 10 to 90% relative humidity range for 3 to 15 psig (20.7 to
103.4 kPa) output.
• Highly sensitive nylon sensing element, designed for
wall-mounting.
• Pneumatic feedback for stable, repeatable operation.
• Matches appearance of TK-Series thermostats.
Model Chart
Model No.
Description
HKS-2033
Duct humidity transmitter.
HKS-5033
Room humidity transmitter.
Specifications
Sensing element
Nylon.
Sensing
Span
80% RH.
Range
10 to 90% RH (non-adjustable).
Output air signal
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa).
Action
Direct.
Ambient limits
Shipping
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C). 0 to 98% RH, non-condensing.
Operating
-20 to 125°F (-29 to 52°C). 10 to 98% RH, non-condensing. 10 to 2500 fpm (0.05 to 12.7 m/s)
sensed air velocity.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa) through 0.0075 in. (190 µm) restrictor.
Minimum
18 psig (124 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air connections
HKS-2033
Barbed for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
HKS-5033
5/32 in. diameter spring reinforced plastic tubing.
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
48 scim (13.2 mL/s).
38
HKS-2033, HKS-5033
Specifications (Continued)
Mounting
HKS-2033
Duct.
HKS-5033
Wall (has beige plastic cover).
Dimensions
HKS-2033
4-3/16 H x 4 W x 2-1/16 D in. (106 x 102 x 52 mm); tube mounting hole diameter is 1-3/8 in. (35 mm)
and tube insertion length is 4-1/4 in. (108 mm).
HKS-5033
4-3/8 H x 2-3/4 W x 1-5/8 D in. (111 x 70 x 43 mm). Order fittings separately for type of wall
construction.
Accessories
Model No.
AKS-1189
AKS-1199
AT-504
AT-505
AT-506
AT-532-098-1-1
AT-532-098-1-2
AT-532-098-1-3
AT-532-111-1-01
AT-532-111-1-03
AT-533-67
AT-533-101
AT-533-127
AT-533-129
Description
Accessory scale plate, +/- 8% RH for HKS-2033, HKS-5033.
Accessory scale plate, +/- 2” water for HKS-2033, HKS-5033.
Plaster hole cover (small).
Surface mounting base.
Pneumatic wall box fitting (two tubes) used for mounting AT-532-111-1-01 under cover of HKS-5033.
0.0075 restrictor (white).
.005" restrictor (Red).
.010" restrictor (Blue).
0.0075 tee restrictor for 5/32 in. plastic tubing.
0.010 tee restrictor for 5/32 in. plastic tubing.
Adaptor 1/4 in. plastic tubing to 3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included).
Adaptor 1/4 in. plastic to 5/32 in. plastic.
Adaptor 3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included) to 5/32 in. plastic.
5/32" x 5/32" Barbed brass connector.
Typical Applications
M
N.C. Steam Valve
8-13 psig
S
HKS-2033, Duct
Transmitter
HKS-5033 Room
Transmitter
N100-0010
V
M
B
M
M
S
R
C
To Steam
Humidifier
STM.
M NC NO C
S
Vac Wire to
Fan Starter
R527 Series E/P Relay
Receiver Controller
(Reverse Acting)
1 HKS-2033 is usually located in the return (or exhaust) air duct, to measure
space relative humidity.
2 HKS-5033 is wall mounted, in the room, to measure area relative humidity.
3 When the air-handling unit fan motor is de-energized, the E/P relay removes
control air from the normally closed steam valve, closing it fully.
Figure 1 Typical Application.
39
HKS-8065
Duct Enthalpy Transmitter
For proportional enthalpy control used with receiver-controller. For
differential enthalpy control, two HKS-8065 are used with AK-52101 to
determine if return or outdoor air has the higher enthalpy. May be used
with receiver-gauges for continuous enthalpy indication at any local or
remote position.
HKS-8065
Features:
• Designed to sense total heat (enthalpy) in air ducts.
• Two highly sensitive sensing elements (nylon for relative humidity, bimetal for
temperature) combine to produce 3 to 15 psig (20.7 to 103.4 kPa) output over the
range of 16 to 40 BTU per pound of dry air (37 to 93 kj/kg).
• Sensing element designed for duct insertion.
Model Chart
Model No.
HKS-8065
Description
Duct humidity transmitter.
Specifications
Sensing element
Sensing
Span
Range
Output air signal
Action
Ambient limits
Shipping
Combination bimetal/nylon.
24 btu/lb (56 KJ/Kg) dry air.
16 to 40 btu/lb (37 to 93 KJ/Kg) dry air.
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa).
Direct.
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C). 0 to 98% RH, non-condensing.
-20 to 125°F (-29 to 52°C). 10 to 98% RH, non-condensing. 10 to 2500 fpm (0.05 to 12.7 m/s)
sensed air velocity.
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
20 psig (138 kPa) through 0.0075 in. (190 µm) restrictor.
18 psig (124 kPa).
30 psig (207 kPa).
Barbed for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tube.
Operating
Supply air pressure
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
Air connections
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
Air capacity for sizing air mains
Mounting
41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa) supply through a 0.0075 in. (190 µm) restrictor.
48 scim (13.2 mL/s) when supplied by a 20 psig (138 kPa) supply air.
Duct.
4-3/16 H x 4 W x 4 D in. (106 x 102 x 102 mm); tube mounting hole diameter is 1-3/8 in. (35 mm) and
tube insertion length is 4-1/4 in. (108 mm).
Dimensions
Accessories
Model No.
AT-532-098-1-1
AT-532-098-1-2
AT-532-098-1-3
AT-533-67
Description
0.0075 restrictor (white).
0.005" restrictor (Red).
0.010" restrictor (Blue).
Adaptor 1/4 in. plastic tubing to 3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included).
Typical Applications
M
1
2
S
1 1000 ft. (305m) max. between
gauge and transmitter.
2 200 ft. (61m) max. between
HKS-8065
restrictor and transmitter.
Duct Enthalpy Transmitter
40
Figure 1 Typical Application.
A20x Series
A20x
Series
Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges for continuous indication of air
pressure in pneumatic control systems.
10
Features:
• 0 to 30 psig models permit readout of main air pressure
and/or output pressures of pneumatic control components.
• 0 to 160 psig models permit readout of pressure in aircompressor receivers or high-pressure main air lines.
• Available in flush-mounted, stem-mounted, bottommounted or lower-back mounted models.
15
5
10
5
20
15
0
20
0
25
25
30
30
A201
A203
10
15
5
10
15
20
0
25
30
A204
A205
Model Chart
Model No.
A201
A203
A204-3
A204-4
A205-01
A205-02
Wholesale
Model No.
2420-001
2420-002
2420-003
2420-004
2420-005
2420-006
Dial Size
in. (mm)
Range
(psi)
Mounting
1-1/2 (38)
0 to 30
2 (51)
Air Connection
1/8 in. MNPT center back
1/8 in. MNPT bottom
Stem
Construction and Finish
ABS plastic case and friction ring
1/8 in. MNPT center back
0 to 160
0 to 30
0 to 160
1/4 in. barb back
1/8 in. MNPT lower back
Flush
Steel case; black enamel case with
chrome plated brass rings
Specifications
Gauge actuation
Flush panel mounting
Dimensions
A201
A203
A204-3, A204-4
A205-01, A205-02
Phosphor bronze Bourdon tube through sturdy brass gears.
A205 Series U-clamp mounting for 1/16 to 3/4 in. thickness panels.
1-42/64 x 1-1/2 in. (34 x 38 mm).
1-15/32 x 1-3/32 in. (37 x 27 mm).
2-11/64 x 1-55/64 in. (55 x 28 mm).
2-1/4 x 1-53/64 in. (57 x 46 mm).
Typical Applications
A20x Series
Pressure Gauge
M
M
Branch Air to
Control Device
N100-0010
B
M
S
R
C
Temperature
Transmitter
3-15 psig
P541
Receiver Controller
Figure 1 Typical Application.
41
M556 Series (2466 Series), M572 Series (2472 Series), M573 Series (2473
Series), M574 Series (2474 Series)
M556
Series
(2466
Series),
M572
Series
(2472
Series),
M573
Series
(2473
Pneumatic Damper Actuators
These actuators are designed for use in pneumatic
control systems to position air control dampers in
response to signals from pneumatic controllers.
The M556 is a large swivel-mounted actuator with
an adjustable crank arm having a clamp to fit a
1/2 in. O.D. damper shaft.
The M570 Series damper actuators are used in
pneumatic control systems to position automatic
air dampers upon receipt of an air pressure signal
from a control device. These actuators are
equipped with right angle brackets and are
adaptable to air conditioning, multi-zone, heating,
ventilating, fan coil units, unit ventilators, mixing
boxes, and VAV terminal boxes. M573 and M574
are also available as post-mounted actuators.
The M583 is used in classroom type unit
ventilators. Special mounting kits are available for
adapting the actuator to the various makes and
models of classroom type units. The M584 is
designed for use on large volume unit ventilators.
An internal spring arrangement permits the
actuator to operate gradually to a preset
percentage of total stroke, hesitate for a preset
pressure range, and then complete its full travel.
When combined with other control devices, these
actuators may be adjusted to perform as required
by ASHRAE control cycles for unit ventilators.
Features:
• Rigid, corrosion-resistant glass-filled nylon bodies.
• M556, M573 and M574 have 303 stainless steel shafts.
• M556, M573 and M574 available with or without
N800-0555 (2850-xxx) positioner.
M556
Shown with Positive Positioner
M572/M573/M574
Right Angle Mounted
Shown without Positive Positioner
M573/M574
Post Mounted Actuator
Shown with N800-0555
Positive Positioner
Model Chart
2 in. Stroke (3 sq. in.).
Model No.
M572-2308
M572-2311
M572-8308
M572-8311
M572-3308
M572-3311
M572-5308
M572-5311
M572-6308
M572-6311
42
Spring Range
psig
Mounting
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
3 to 12
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
4 to 8
5 to 10
8 to 13
10 to 15
Description
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Right-angle
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
M556 Series (2466 Series), M572 Series (2472 Series), M573 Series (2473
Series), M574 Series (2474 Series)
Hesitation Actuator.
Stroke
Diaphragm
Area
Spring Range
psig
Mounting
Description
M583-0520
2 in.
7 sq. in.
1 to 4 and 8 to 12
Post-mtd.
Actuator with stamped clevis, clevis pin and
bracket; for use on air handlers where factory
mounting has not been established.
M584-0211
3 in.
11 sq. in.
1 to 4 and 8 to 13
Right-angle
Actuator with pushrod and stamped crankarm
for 90° rotation of 1/2 in. damper shaft.
Model No.a
a
Total stroke of these hesitation actuators takes place in two stages, from 1 to 4 and 8 to 12 (or 8 to 13) psig. No shaft movement from 4 to 8 psig.
3 in. Stroke (7 sq. in.).
Model No.
Spring Range
psig
M573-2108
M573-2111
3 to 12
M573-2520
4 to 8
M573-8520
M573-3111
5 to 10
M573-3520
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Right-angle
Right-angle
Right-angle
M573-1111
M573-5108
Right-angle
Post-mtd.
M573-1108
M573-1520
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Post-mtd.
M573-3108
8 to 13
Post-mtd.
Right-angle
M573-5111
Description
Right-angle
Post-mtd.
M573-8108
M573-8111
Mounting
Actuator with clevis and pin.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with clevis and pin.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with clevis and pin.
Actuator with complete linkage and positive positioner for 5/16 in.
push rod and 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with positive positioner.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
M573-5520
Post-mtd.
M573-6108
Right-angle
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Right-angle
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
M573-6111
M573-6520
10 to 15
Post-mtd.
Actuator with clevis and pin.
Actuator.
43
M556 Series (2466 Series), M572 Series (2472 Series), M573 Series (2473
Series), M574 Series (2474 Series)
4 in. Stroke (11 sq. in.).
Spring Range
psig
Model No.
Mounting
M574-2208
M574-2211
Right-angle
3 to 12
M574-2520
Post-mtd.
M574-8208
M574-8211
Right-angle
4 to 8
M574-8520
Post-mtd.
M574-3208
M574-3211
Right-angle
5 to 10
M574-3520
Post-mtd.
M574-1054
Description
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with clevis and pin.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with 1/2 in. shaft linkage and bracket.
Actuator with clevis and pin.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with clevis and pin.
Actuator for Keystone butterfly valve, w/positioner.
M574-1208
Right-angle
M574-1211
8 to 13
M574-1520
Post-mtd.
M574-5208
Right-angle
M574-5211
M574-6208
M574-6211
10 to 15
Actuator with complete linkage and positive positioner for 5/16 in.
push rod and 1/2 in. damper shafts.
Actuator with positive positioner.
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Actuator with 1/2 in. shaft linkage and bracket.
Right-angle
Actuator with ball joint to accept 5/16 in. push rod.
Right-angle
Actuator with complete linkage for 1/2 in. damper shafts.
M574-6520
Post-mtd.
Actuator.
6 in. Stroke (24.8 sq. in.).
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Spring Range
psig
Mounting
Description
M556-14
60° to 120° adj. linkage to accept 1/2 in. shafts
w/positioner (with 5 psi span feedback spring).
M556-1402
w/Positioner, for Keystone butterfly valve.
M556-51
M556-5101
M556-5102
44
8 to 13
M556-5101
Swivel-mtd.
60° to 120° adjustable linkage to accept 1/2 in. shafts.
No linkage. Hole in end of shaft is tapped to receive a 3/8”
- 16 machine screw.
For Keystone butterfly valve.
M556 Series (2466 Series), M572 Series (2472 Series), M573 Series (2473
Series), M574 Series (2474 Series)
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Glass-filled nylon.
Diaphragm
Neoprene, rolling type.
Shaft
Stainless Steel on M556, M573, M574. Nickel plated steel on M572, M583, M584.
Stroke
Refer to Model Chart.
Spring
Retract actuator shaft on loss of air pressure.
Ambient temperature limits
-20 to 180°F (-29 to 82°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required.
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa). [M580 Series nominal 0 to 15 psig (0 to 103 kPa).]
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air consumption (positioner
models)
0.017 scfm.
Adjustments
Hesitation stroke start point
Finish stroke start point
Connections
4 psig (28 kPa); stroke adjustable 20% to 70% prior to 4 psig (M58X only).
8 psig (55 kPa); stroke adjustable 80% to 30% after 8 psig (M58X only).
Barbed fitting for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Dimensions
M556 Series
5-3/4 dia. x 17 L in. (146 x 432 mm).
M573 Series
3-3/4 dia. x 14 L in. (95 x 356 mm).
M574 Series
4-5/8 dia. x 15-1/8 L in. (117 x 384 mm).
45
M556 Series (2466 Series), M572 Series (2472 Series), M573 Series (2473
Series), M574 Series (2474 Series)
Accessories
Model No.
AM-112
AM-113
AM-115
AM-122
AM-123
AM-125
AM-125-048
AM-132
N5-75
N800-1403
N800-1404
N800-1414
N800-1415
M556 Kits
















Wholesale Model No.
Description
Slotted crank arm for 3/8 in. shaft
Slotted crank arm for 1/2 in. shaft.
Slotted crank arm for 7/16 in. shaft.
Straight connector.
Damper clip.
5/16 x 20 in. damper rod.
5/16 x 48 in. damper rod.
Ball joint connector.
1/2 in. I.D. shaft coupling to extend damper drive shafts (includes four set screws).
Slotted crank arm for 3/8 in. shaft.
Slotted crank arm for 1/2 in. shaft.
3-hole crank arm for 3/8 in. shaft (for 2, 3, 4 in. strokes).
3-hole crank arm for 1/2 in. shaft (for 2, 3, 4 in. strokes).
2850-031
2850-053
2850-054
Add-on positioner kit, 3 psig span. Includes positioner and mounting hardware.
Add-on positioner kit, 5 psig span. Includes positioner and mounting hardware.
Add-on positioner kit, 10 psig span. Includes positioner and mounting hardware.
2850-017
2850-018
2850-028
Add-on positioner kit, 5 psig span feedback spring.
Add-on positioner kit, 10 psig span feedback spring.
Add-on positioner kit, 3 psig span feedback spring.
2850-019
2850-020
Add-on positioner kit, 5 psig feedback spring.
Add-on positioner kit, 10 psig span feedback spring.
M573 Kits



M574 Kits


Actuators (no linkage)
N800-0203

N800-0206

N800-0208

N800-0255

N800-0302

N800-0303

N800-0305

N800-0308

N800-0353

N800-0403

N800-0405

N800-0455

Diaphragms
N800-9422

N800-9423

N800-9424

N800-9426

Replacement Springs for M572 Series
N800-4202

N800-4203

N800-4205

N800-4206

N800-4208

Replacement Springs for M573 Series
N800-4302

N800-4303

N800-4305

N800-4306

N800-4308

Replacement Springs for M574 Series
N800-4402

N800-4405

N800-4408

46
2 in. stroke, 5 to 10 psig.
2 in. stroke, 10 to 15 psig.
2 in. stroke, 4 to 8 psig.
2 in. stroke,8 to 13 psig, bare swivel.
3 in. stroke, 3 to 12 psig.
3 in. stroke, 5 to 10 psig.
3 in. stroke, 8 to 13 psig.
3 in. stroke, 4 to 8 psig.
3 in. stroke, 5 to 10 psig.
4 in. stroke, 5 to 10 psig.
4 in. stroke, 8 to 13 psig.
4 in. stroke, 8 to 13 psig, bare swivel.
For M572 (2472) Series.
For M573 (2473) Series.
For M574 (2474) Series.
For M556 (2466) Series.
3 to 12 psig
5 to 10 psig.
8 to 13 psig.
10 to 15 psig.
4 to 8 psig.
3 to 12 psig.
5 to 10 psig.
8 to 13 psig.
10 to 15 psig.
4 to 8 psig.
3 to 12 psig.
8 to 13 psig.
4 to 8 psig.
MK-2690
MK-2690
Pneumatic Valve Actuator
For proportional pneumatic control of 1/2 in. to 2 in.
VB-7xxx Series valves (subject to close-off ratings)
and discontinued 1/2 in. to 1-1/4 in. VB-9xxx valves.
Features:
• Compact size with 6 in.2 (39 cm2) effective area.
• Rugged die cast aluminum housing.
• Replaceable beaded molded neoprene diaphragm.
Model Chart
Nominal Spring Rangea (Spring Color Code)
Model No.
MK-2690
a
psig
kPa
3 to 7 (Yellow)
21 to 48
5 to 10 (Black)
34 to 69
8 to 13 (Blue)
55 to 90
Nominal (no load) condition, spring ranges based on 1/2 in. (13 mm) maximum stroke, provided by AV-7400 or AV-400 linkage (order separately).
Specifications
Inputs Compatible with
Start point
Air connections
Proportional pneumatic signal. Refer to Model Chart.
Non-adjustable.
1/8 in. FNPT located on side of housing.
Mechanical Outputs
Stroke
1/2 in. (12.6 mm) nominal.
Environment
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping: -40 to 220°F (-40 to 104°C).
Operating: -20 to 220°F (-29 to 104°C).
Humidity
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Maximum air pressure
30 psig (207 kPa).
Spring
Stainless steel spring retracts actuator shaft and raises valve stem on loss of air pressure. Springs
provided in AV-400 or AV-7400 linkage (order separately).
Dimensions
3-9/16 H x 5 W x 2-1/4 D in. (90 x 127 x 57 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AK-42309-500
AV-400
AV-7400
TOOL-095-1
Maintenance Parts
PNV-144-43
PNV-145-44
PNV-145-43
PNV-102-1
PNV-104-2
Description
Positive positioner and linkage.
Valve linkage (includes parts for VB-7xxx and discontinued 1/2 to1-1/4 in. VB-9xxx valves).
Valve linkage for VB-7xxx valves only.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
3 to 7 psig spring.
5 to 10 psig spring.
8 to 13 psig spring.
Diaphragm.
Piston.
47
MK-3xxx Series, MK4-3xxx Series
MK-3xxx
Series,
MK4-3xxx
Series
Pneumatic Damper Actuators
Proportional pneumatic actuator with 8 in.2
(52 cm2) effective area used to control dampers,
mixing boxes, air valves, etc., in heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
Features:
• Rugged cast aluminum bodies.
• Long lasting rolling diaphragm.
• Provisions for adjustable stroke-stop.
MK-31xx Series
MK-38xx Series
Model Chart
Maximum Forceb
Return
Stroke
Model No.
MK-3101
MK-3111
Nominal
Operating
Range
Starting Pressure
Nominal
Strokea
psig
kPa
psig
kPa
in. (mm)
3 to 8
21 to 55
3 ±1
21 ±7
3-1/2 (89),
adjustable
2 to 4
(51 to 102)
5 to 10
34 to 69
5 ±1
34 ±7
Power Stroke
20 psi
(138 kPa)
Supply
Single or
Dual
Press.
Based on
1.5 psi
(10 kPa)
Pressure
to
Actuator
15 psi
(103 kPa)
Supply
Dual
Press.
System
15 psi
(103 kPa)
Supply
Single
Press.
lb
(N)
lb
(N)
lb
(N)
lb
(N)
12
(53)
44
(196)
56
(249)
96
(427)
28
(125)
28
(125)
40
(178)
80
(356)
Systemd
a
Factory setting required for published operating range.
b
Force and torques based on factory set stroke and starting pressure.
c
Nominal torque for actuators without positive positioner is based on 1.5 psi pressure change at the actuator.
d
Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator.
48
Nominal Torque c
Proportional Controlb
System d
20 psi
(138 kPa)
Supply
Single or
Dual
Press.
15 psi
(103 kPa)
Supply
Dual
Press.
System
15 psi
(103 kPa)
Supply
Single
Press.
lb-in.
(N-m)
lb-in.
(N-m)
lb-in.
(N-m)
21
(2.37)
21
(2.37)
21
(2.37)
System d
System d
MK-3xxx Series, MK4-3xxx Series
Model Chart (Continued)
Maximum Forceb
Return
Stroke
Nominal Operating
Range
Starting Pressure
Nominal
a
Stroke
Model No.
psig
kPa
psig
3-1/2 (89),
adjustable
2 to 4
(51 to 102)
52
(231)
12
(53)
8 to 13
55 to 90
8 ±1
55 ±7
MK-3141
3 to 13
21 to 90
3 non-adj.
21
non-adj.
MK-3151
3 to 6,
9 to 12
21 to 41,
62 to 83
MK-3161
3 to 6, 21 to 41,
11 to 17 76 to 117
MK-3821
8 to 13
MK4-3821 e
lb
(N)
in. (mm)
MK4-3121e
55 to 90
20 psi
20 psi
15 psi
15 psi
15 psi
Based on
15 psi
(138 kPa)
(138 kPa)
(103 kPa) (103 kPa)
1.5 psi
(103 kPa) (103 kPa)
Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
(10 kPa)
Supply
Single or
Single or
Single
Single
Dual
Pressure
Dual
Dual
Dual
Press.
Press.
Press.
to
Press.
Press.
Press.
d
d
System
Actuator
System
System
System
System d
System d
kPa
MK-3121
3 to 6
21 to 41
2-3/4 (70),
adjustable
2 to 2-3/4
(51 to 70)
8 ±1
55 ±1
3-1/2 (89),
adjustable
2 to 4
(51 to 102)
8 to 13
Nominal Torquec
Proportional Controlb
Power Stroke
52
(231)
lb
(N)
lb
(N)
lb
(N)
lb-in.
(N-m)
4
(18)
16
(71)
56
(249)
7
(0.79)
12
(53)
24
(107)
64
(285)
21
(2.37)
0
(0)
0
(0)
24
(107)
0
(0)
4
(18)
16
(71)
56
(249)
7
(0.79)
a
Factory setting required for published operating range.
b
Force and torques based on factory set stroke and starting pressure.
c
Nominal torque for actuators without positive positioner is based on 1.5 psi pressure change at the actuator.
d
Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator.
e
Factory installed positive positioner (AK-42309-500) start point adjustable 2 to 10 psi with span adjustable 2 to 10 psi.
lb-in.
(N-m)
lb-in.
(N-m)
21
(2.37)
21
(2.37)
28
(3.16)
91
(10.28)
21
(2.37)
0
(0)
21
(2.37)
21
(2.37)
28
(3.16)
91
(10.28)
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Die cast aluminum.
Diaphragm
Beaded molded neoprene.
Stroke
Refer to Model Chart.
Nominal Damper Area
Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with damper manufacturer’s specifications.
Start point
Adjustable on most models ±1 psi, refer to Model Chart.
Spring
Retracts actuator shaft on loss of air pressure.
Maximum air pressure
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping
Operating
-40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
-20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C).
Air connections
1/8 in. FNPT.
Mounting
In any position. Mounting bracket (except MK-3300 Series end mounting) and connector for 5/16 in.
(8 mm) diameter push rod included with actuator.
Dimensions
MK-3100, MK4-3100 Series
12 L x 5-7/8 W x 5-1/2 D in. (305 x 149 x 140 mm).
MK-3800 Series
20-3/16 L x 7-1/4 W x 6-1/2 D in. (513 x 184 x 165 mm).
49
MK-3xxx Series, MK4-3xxx Series
Accessories
Model No.
AK-42309-500
AM-111
AM-112
AM-113
AM-115
AM-122
AM-123
AM-125
AM-125-048
AM-132
AM-161-3
AM-301
AM-530
AM-532
AM-533
AM-534
AM-535
AM-536
AM-545
TOOL-095-1
Maintenance Parts
PND-45-343
PND-45-345
PND-45-348
PND-002-1
PND-91
50
Description
Positive positioner and linkage.
Crank arm for 5/16 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 3/8 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 1/2 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 7/16 in. diameter damper shaft.
Linkage connector straight type.
Damper clip.
5/16 x 20 in. damper rod.
5/16 x 48 in. damper rod.
Ball joint connector.
Damper linkage kit AM-113 crank arm and AM-132 connector).
90° mounting bracket for pivot mounting.
Crank arm for 1/2 in. diameter damper shaft holes for 3-1/2 in. and 4-1/2 in. stroke.
Bolt-on frame lug and damper blade clip kit.
Actuator shaft extension.
Pivot stud for pivot mounting.
Clevis for pivot mounting.
Mounting plates for pivot mounting on ducts or damper frame.
Rod end connector for 5/16 in. (10 mm) dia. rods.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
3 to 8 green spring.
5 to 10 black spring.
8 to 13 blue spring.
Diaphragm.
High temperature diaphragm.
MK-44xx Series, MK4-44xx Series
MK-44xx
Damper Actuators, Proportional
Series,
MK4-44xx
For proportional pneumatic actuator with 11 sq. in.
Series
(71 cm2) effective area used to control damper and
air valves in heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning systems.
Features:
• Rugged cast aluminum body.
• Special linkage permits easy adjustment of stroke to suit
various applications.
• Hesitation and non-hesitation models available.
Model Chart
Maximum Forcea
Model No.
Nominal
Operating
Range
Starting
Pressure
Adjustable
Return
Stroke
Nominal Torqueb
Proportional Control a
Power Stroke
Based on
1.5 psi
Pressure
to Actuator
15 psi
Supply
Dual
Press.
System
15 psi
Supply
Single
Press.
20 psi
Supply
Single or
Dual Press.
15 psi
Supply
Single
Press.
20 psi
Supply
Single or
Dual Press.
System c
15 psi
Supply
Dual
Press.
System
Systemc
System c
System c
psig
psig
lb
lb
lb
lb
lb-in.
lb-in.
lb-in.
MK-4401
MK4-4401d
3 to 8
3 ±1
8.25
30.25
38.5
66
7.9
7.9
7.9
MK-4411
MK4-4411 d
5 to 10
5 ±1
19.25
19.25
27.5
55
7.9
7.9
7.9
MK-4421
MK4-4421 d
8 to 13
8 ±1
35.75
2.75
11
38.5
2.6
7.9
7.9
MK-4451
MK4-4451 d
3 to 6,
9 to 12
8.25
16.5
44
7.9
7.9
MK-4461
MK4-4461 d
3 to 6,
11 to 17
3 to 6
8.25
0
0
16.5
0
0
7.9
a
Force and torques on based on factory set stroke and starting pressure.
b
Nominal torque for actuators is based on 1.5 psi (10 kPa) pressure change at the actuator.
c
Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator. MK-4421 requires that 15 psi (103 kPa) be available to actuator.
MK-4461 requires that 20 psi (138 kPa) be available to actuator.
d
Factory installed positive positioner (AK-42309-500) start point adjustable 2 to 10 psi with span adjustable 2 to 10 psi.
51
MK-44xx Series, MK4-44xx Series
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Die cast aluminum.
Diaphragm
Replaceable beaded molded neoprene (Part number PNV-2).
Stroke
Linkage
Adjustable 1/2 to 3 in. (13 to 76 mm); factory set for 2 in. (51 mm).
Diaphragm
Factory set for 1 in. (25 mm).
Nominal Damper Area
Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with damper manufacturer’s specifications.
Start point
Adjustable. Refer to Description Model Chart.
Spring
Retracts actuator crank arm on loss of air pressure.
Maximum air pressure
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping
-40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
Operating
-20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C).
Air connections
1/8 in. FNPT.
Mounting
In any position. Mounting bracket, linkage, and connector for 5/16 in. (8 mm) diameter push rod
assembled to actuator.
Dimensions
7-7/16 H x 5-3/4 W x 4-7/8 D in. (189 x 146 x 124 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AK-42309-500
AM-111
AM-112
AM-113
AM-115
AM-122
AM-123
AM-125
AM-125-048
AM-132
AM-161-3
AM-743
TOOL-095-1
Maintenance Parts
PND-145-104
PND-145-104
PND-145-107
PNV-002
52
Description
Positive positioning relay.
Crank arm for 5/16 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 3/8 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 1/2 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 7/16 in. diameter damper shaft.
Linkage connector straight type.
Damper clip.
5/16 x 20 in. damper rod.
5/16 x 48 in. damper rod.
Ball joint connector.
Damper linkage kit (AM-173 crank arm and AM-132 connector).
Linkage kit for M-693 Series replacement.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
3 to 8 psig spring.
5 to 10 psig spring.
8 to 12 psig spring.
Diaphragm.
MK-46xx Series, MK4-46xx Series
MK-46xx
Valve Actuators, Proportional
Series,
MK4-46xx
For proportional pneumatic actuator with 11 sq. in.
Series
(71 cm2) effective diaphragm area used to control
1/2 in. to 2 in. VB-7xxx series valves and SP-3xx00
step controllers.
Features:
• Rugged die cast aluminum construction.
• Rolling diaphragm.
• Multiple spring ranges for various applications.
• Adjustable start point (refer to Specifications).
• 1/2 in. nominal stroke.
• Can also be used on 1/2" stroke discontinued VB-9xxx
series valves (1/2” to 1-1/4”).
Model Chart
Nominal Spring Rangea
Model No.
psig
kPa
MK-4601, MK4-4601
3 to 6
21 to 41
MK-4611, MK4-4611
5 to 10
34 to 69
10 to 13
69 to 90
MK-4621, MK4-4621
MK-4621-422
10 to 11.25
69 to 77
3 to 13
21 to 90
MK-4641
a
Nominal (no load) spring ranges based on 1/2 in. (13 mm) maximum stroke.
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Die cast aluminum.
Diaphragm
Replaceable beaded molded neoprene (Part number PNV-2).
Stroke
1/2 in. (25.4 mm) nominal.
Spring
Retracts actuator shaft and raises valve stem on loss of air pressure.
Nominal spring range
Refer to Model Chart.
Starting point
Field adjustable.
MK-4601, MK-4621 (-422)
MK-4611, MK-4641
Maximum air pressure
+1/2 psig (7 to 14 kPa).
±2 psig (14 kPa).
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping
-40 to 220°F (-40 to 104°C).
Operating
-20 to 220°F (-29 to 104°C).
Air connections
1/8 in. FNPT.
Valve linkage
Order separately AV-401.
Mounting
In any upright position with actuator head above the center line of the valve body.
Dimensions
3-7/8 H x 4-3/4 W x 4-3/4 D in. (99 x 121 x 121 mm).
53
MK-46xx Series, MK4-46xx Series
Accessories
Model No.
AK-42309-500
TOOL-095-1
Maintenance Parts
PNV-002
PNV-004-2
PNV-232
PNV-238
PNV-239
PNV-251
54
Description
Positive positioner and linkage; use with MK-46X1.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Diaphragm.
Piston.
10 to 11.25 psig spring for MK-4621-422.
3 to 6 psig spring for MK-4601.
10 to 13 psig spring for MK-4621.
High temperature diaphragm.
MK-6xxx Series
Valve Actuators, Proportional
Proportional pneumatic actuator with 50 sq. in.
(323 cm2) effective diaphragm area used to control
1-1/2 in. to 2 in. VB-7xxx series, 2-1/2 in. to 5 in.
VB-8xxx series, 2-1/2 in. to 4 in. discontinued
VB-9xxx series and 4 in. to 6 in. discontinued
VB-9323 series valves.
Features:
• Rugged die cast aluminum construction.
• Rolling diaphragm.
• Three spring ranges for various applications.
• Start point adjustable ±2 psi.
MK-6xxx
Series
MK-6911
MK-6921
MK-68x1
MK-66x1
Model Chart
Nominal Spring Rangea
Model No.
Nominal Stroke in. (mm)
psig
kPa
MK-6601
3 to 8
21 to 55
1/2 (13.7)
MK-6611
5 to 10
34 to 69
1/2 (13.7)
MK-6621
8 to 13
55 to 90
1/2 (13.7)
MK-6801
3 to 8
21 to 55
MK-6811
5 to 10
34 to 69
MK-6821
8 to 13
55 to 90
MK-6911bc
5 to 10
34 to 69
1-1/2 (33.1)
MK-6921b
8 to 13
55 to 90
1-1/2 (33.1)
1 (25.4)
a
Nominal (no load) spring ranges based on maximum 1/2 in. (13.7 mm), 1 in. (25.4 mm) or 1-1/2 in. (33.1 mm) stroke for MK-6911.
MK-6911 is only used on 6 in. VB-8xx3-0-5-16. MK-6911 and MK-6921 were used on discontinued 4 to 6 in. VB-9323-0-5-x.
c Recommended for field replacements only where 20 psi air supply pressure is not available and/or required close-off pressure is less than 125 psi.
b
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Diaphragm
Stroke
Spring
Nominal spring range
Starting point
Maximum air pressure
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping
Operating
Air connections
Valve linkage
Mounting
Dimensions
Die cast aluminum.
Replaceable beaded molded neoprene (Part number PNV-202).
Refer to Model Chart.
Retracts actuator shaft and raises valve stem on loss of air pressure.
Refer to Model Chart.
Adjustable ±2 psig (14 kPa).
30 psig (207 kPa).
-40 to 220°F (-40 to 104°C).
-20 to 220°F (-29 to 104°C).
1/8 in. FNPT.
Refer to Accessories (order separately).
In any upright position with actuator head above the center line of the valve body.
7-3/4 H x 10-1/2 W x 10-1/2 D in. (199 x 267 x 267 mm).
55
MK-6xxx Series
Accessories
Model No.
AK-42309-500
TOOL-075
TOOL-095-1
Linkage
AV-430
AV-495
AV-497
Maintenance Parts
MK-68xx Series (1 in. stroke)
PNV-245-103
PNV-245-105
PNV-245-108
MK-66xx Series (1/2 in. stroke)
PNV-245-013
PNV-245-015
PNV-245-018
MK-69xx Series (1-1/2 in. stroke)
PNV-245-148
PNV-245-145
All Series
PNV-202
56
Description
Positive positioner and linkage.
Spring compression tool.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Valve Body Series
VB-7xx3, 1-1/2 to 2 in.
VB-7xx4, 1-1/2 to 2 in.
VB-9323, 2-1/2 to 6 in. (discontinued).
VB-9213, 2-1/2 to 4 in.(discontinued).
VB-9223, 2-1/2 to 4 in.(discontinued).
VB-9313, 2-1/2 to 4 in.
VB-8213, 2-1/2 to 6 in.
VB-8223, 2-1/2 to 6 in.
VB-8303, 2-1/2 to 6 in.
3 to 8 psig spring.
5 to 10 psig spring.
8 to 13 psig spring.
3 to 8 psig spring.
5 to 10 psig spring.
8 to 13 psig spring.
8 to 13 psig spring.
5 to 10 psig spring.
Diaphragm.
MK-71xx Series, MK4-71xx
MK-71xx
Series,
MK4-71xx
Damper Actuators, Proportional
For proportional pneumatic actuator with 20 sq. in.
(129 cm2) effective area used to control damper
and air valves in heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning systems.
Features:
• Rugged cast aluminum body.
• Completely enclosed spring.
• Long lasting rolling diaphragms.
Model Chart
Maximum Forcea
Return
Stroke
Model No.
MK-7101
MK4-7101
MK-7121
MK4-7121d
Nominal
Starting
Operating Pressure
Range
Adjustable
Nominal Torqueb
Proportional Control a
Power Stroke
15 psi
Based on
1.5 psi
Supply
Pressure Dual Press.
to Actuator
System
15 psi
Supply
Single
Press.
20 psi
Supply
Single or
Dual Press.
Systemc
15 psi
Supply
Single
Press.
20 psi
Supply
Single or
Dual
Press.
System c
15 psi
Supply
Dual
Press.
System
System c
lb-in.
lb-in.
67.5
67.5
90
293
psig
psig
lb
lb
lb
lb
lb-in.
3 to 8
3 ±5
30
110
140
240
67.5
8 to 13
8 ±0.5
130
10
40
140
22.5
System c
a
Force and torques based on factory set stroke and starting pressure.
b
Nominal torque for actuators without positioner is based on 1.5 psi (10 kPa) pressure change at the actuator. MK-7121 requires 15 psi (103 kPa) be
available to actuator.
c
Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator. MK4-7121 requires 20 psi (138 kPa) be available to actuator.
d
Factory installed positive positioner (AK-42309-500) start point adjustable 1 to 12 psi (7 to 83 kPa) with span adjustable 2 to 13 psi (14 to 90 kPa).
57
MK-71xx Series, MK4-71xx
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Die cast aluminum.
Diaphragm
Replaceable beaded molded neoprene.
Stroke
Nominal 4-1/2 in. (114 mm), adjustable 4 to 5 in. (102 to 127 mm).
Nominal Damper Area
Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with damper manufacturer’s specifications.
Start point
Adjustable, refer to Description Model Chart.
Spring
Retracts actuator crank arm on loss of air pressure.
Maximum air pressure
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping
Operating
-40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
-20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C).
Air connections
1/8 in. FNPT.
Mounting
In any position.
Dimensions
17-5/8 H x 7-3/4 W x 7-5/8 D in. (448 x 197 x 194 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AK-42309-500
AM-301
AM-530a
AM-532
AM-538
AM-542
AM-543
TOOL-095-1
Maintenance Parts
PND-90
PND-202
PND-203
PND-245-103
PND-245-108
Description
Positive positioner and linkage.
90 degree mounting bracket for floor mounting.
Crank arm for 1/2 in. diameter damper shaft. Holes for 4-1/2 in. stroke.
Bolt-on frame lug and damper blade clip kit.
Actuator brace kit.
Rod end connector for 5/16 in. (10 mm) rod.b
Actuator shaft extension.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
High temperature diaphragm.
Diaphragm.
Lower housing.
3 to 8 psig spring.
8 to 13 psig spring.
a
Required to connect damper actuator to damper.
b
NOTE: Maximum length of 5/16 in. (8 mm) rod which can be used with AM-542, 15 in. (381 mm).
58
MK-7821, MK-7921
MK-7821,
MK-7921
Floor Mounted Damper Actuators
For proportional pneumatic actuator used to
control inlet vanes on small and medium size fans
or large jackshafted dampers.
Features:
• Dual actuators, operating a single shaft and piloted by a
position, provide maximum capacity for heavy loads.
• Lever with multiple holes facilitates stroke adjustment to
suit various applications.
• Rigid steel base provides firm actuator support.
MK-7921
Model Chart
Stroke in. (mm)
Model No.
Diaph.
Area
(Total)
4
(102)
5
(127)
6
(152)
7
(178)
8
(203)
9
(229)
Max.
10
(254)
11
(279)
12
(305)
13
(330)
in.2
(cm2)
Lb (N) Force Available for Various Strokesb
Torque
b
Power
Stroke
lb-in.
(N-m)
Nominal
Return Torque for
Stroke Proportional
lb-in.
Controla
(N-m)
lb-in.
(N-m)
MK-7821
Single
20
(129)
135
(600)
108
(480)
90
(400)
77
(343)
68
(302)
60
(267)
54
(240)
49
(218)
45
(200)
42
(187)
315
(35.5)
360
(40.6)
67.5
(7.6)
MK-7921
Dual
40
(258)
270
(1201)
216
(961)
180
(801)
154
(685)
136
(605)
120
(534)
109
(465)
98
(436)
90
(400)
84
(374)
630
(71.0)
720
(81.2)
135
(15.2)
a
Based on a 1.5 psig (10kPa) pressure change at the actuator.
b
With 20 psig (138 kPa) main supply.
59
MK-7821, MK-7921
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Die cast aluminum.
Diaphragm
Replaceable beaded molded neoprene.
Assembly
Actuator(s) and positive positioner (AK-42309-500) are factory mounted on a frame of channel and
angle iron.
Rotary output
Stroke
Provided by a driving lever arm connected to a bearing supported jackshaft.
Rotary output of 60° driving lever arm connecting point adjustable from 4 to 13 in. (102 to 330 mm),
in 1 in. (25.4 mm) increments, from centerline of jackshaft.
Nominal Damper Area
Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with damper manufacturer’s specifications.
Connecting linkage
AM-394 adjustable 15-3/4 to 24-3/4 in. (400 to 629 mm) is included to link actuator to damper.
Spring
Retracts actuator shaft on loss of air pressure.
Maximum air pressure
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping
Operating
-40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
-20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C).
Air connections
Barbed fitting for 1/4 in. plastic tubing.
Mounting
Floor.
Dimensions
30-1/2 H x 16 W x 20 D in. (775 x 406 x 508 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AM-535
Maintenance Parts
PND-90
PND-202
PND-245-103
PND-245-108
60
Description
Clevis with 3/8 in. FNPT.
High temperature diaphragm.
Diaphragm.
2 to 8 psig spring.
8 to 13 psig spring.
MK-88xx Series, MK-89xx Series
MK-88xx
Series,
MK-89xx
Series
Valve Actuators, Proportional
Proportional pneumatic actuator with 100 in.2
(645 cm2) effective area. MK-88xx Series used to
control 2-1/2 in. through 4 in. valves requiring 1 in.
stroke. MK-89xx Series used to control 5 in. and 6 in.
valves requiring 2 in. nominal stroke. Used with
VB-931x and discontinued VB-921x, VB-922x valves.
Features:
• Heavy duty aluminum construction.
• Large diaphragm area provides the required force to
modulate large valves.
• Valve stroke indicated in 1/8 in. increments.
MK-89xx Series
MK-88xx Series
Model Chart
Nominal Spring Rangea
Model No.
psig
kPa
MK-8801
MK-8811
3 to 8
5 to 10
21 to 55
34 to 69
MK-8821
8 to 13
55 to 90
MK-8901
MK-8911
3 to 8
5 to 10
21 to 55
34 to 69
MK-8921
8 to 13
55 to 90
a
Nominal Stroke
in.
mm
1
25.4
2
50.8
For Use with
Valve Bodies
2-1/2 to 4 in.
VB-9213
VB-9223
VB-9313
5 in. and 6 in.
VB-9213
VB-9223
VB-9313
Nominal (no load) spring ranges are based on maximum 1 in. (25.4 mm) or 2 in. (50.8 mm) stroke.
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Die cast aluminum.
Diaphragm
Replaceable beaded molded neoprene.
Stroke
Refer to Model Chart.
Spring
Retracts actuator shaft and raises valve stem on loss of air pressure.
Nominal spring range
Refer to Model Chart.
Starting point
Adjustable ±1 psi (7 kPa).
Maximum air pressure
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping
Operating
-40 to 220°F (-40 to 104°C).
-20 to 220°F (-29 to 104°C).
Air connection
1/8 in. FNPT.
Valve linkage
Order separately AV-496-0-0-1.
Valve stroke position indication
1/8 in. (3 mm) increments.
Mounting
In any upright position with actuator head above 45° of the center line of the valve body.
Dimensions
MK-88xx Series
11-3/4 H x 10-1/2 W x 10-1/2 D in. (298 x 267 x 267 mm).
MK-89xx Series
12-3/4 H x 10-1/2 W x 10-1/2 D in. (342 x 267 x 267 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AK-42309-500
TOOL-095-1
Maintenance Parts
PNV-202
PNV-312
Description
Positive positioner with linkage.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Diaphragm (2 required).
Rolling diaphragm.
61
MK-121xx Series
MK-121xx
Series
Damper Actuators, Proportional
For proportional pneumatic actuator with 3 in.2
(19 cm2) effective area used to control small
dampers and mixing boxes.
Features:
• All-plastic construction.
• Meets UL-465 requirements for air plenum mounting.
• Ideal for VAV terminal unit control.
Model Chart
Maximum Forcea
Return
Stroke
Model No.
Nominal
Operating Stroke
Range
psi
MK-12100
3 to 8
MK-12110
5 to 10
MK-12120
8 to 13
MK-12140
3 to 13
in.
2
Starting
Pressure
Based on
Non1.5 psi
Adjustable
Pressure
to
Actuator
Nominal Torqueb
Proportional Control a
Power Stroke
15 psi
Supply
Dual
Press.
System
15 psi
Supply
Single
Press.
Systemc
20 psi
Supply
Single or
Dual
Press.
System c
psi
lb
lb
lb
lb
3
4.5
16.5
21
36
5
10.5
10.5
15
30
8
19.5
3
4.5
1.5
6
21
a
Force and torques based on factory set stroke, starting pressure, and 90° rotation of driven damper shaft.
b
Nominal torque for actuators is based on 1.5 psi (10 kPa) pressure change at the actuator.
c
Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator.
15 psi
Supply
Single
Press.
20 psi
Supply
Single or
Dual
Press.
15 psi
Supply
Dual
Press.
System
System c
lb-in.
lb-in.
lb-in.
4.5
4.5
System c
4.5
1.5
Specifications
Construction
Housing
Rynite, Zytel, and Ultem UL-94-5V flame rated plastic material to meet UL-465 requirements for
air plenum mounting.
Diaphragm
Beaded molded neoprene.
Stroke
2 in. (50.8 mm).
Nominal Damper Area
Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with damper manufacturer’s specifications.
Spring
Retracts actuator shaft on loss of air pressure.
Maximum air pressure
30 psig (207 kPa).
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping
Operating
-40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C).
-20 to 150°F (-29 to 66°C).
Air connections
Barbed for 1/4 in. and 5/32 in. O.D. plastic tube [for runs up to 20 ft. (6 m)].
Mounting
In any position. Mounting bracket and ball joint connector for 5/16 in. diameter push rod assembled to
actuator.
Dimensions
5-5/8 H x 3-9/16 W x 3-5/16 D in. (143 x 90 x 84 mm).
62
MK-121xx Series
Accessories
Model No.
AM-111
AM-112
AM-113
AM-115
AM-122
AM-123
AM-125
AM-125-048
AM-132
AM-161-3
TOOL-095-1
Description
Crank arm for 5/16 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 3/8 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 1/2 in. diameter damper shaft.
Crank arm for 7/16 in. diameter damper shaft.
Linkage connector straight type.
Damper clip.
5/16 x 20 in. damper rod.
5/16 x 48 in. damper rod.
Ball joint connector.
Damper linkage kit (AM-113 crank arm and AM-132 connector).
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
63
N100-25xx Series
N100-25xx
Series
Pneumatic Limit Controls
These controls open an integral pneumatic switch
when sensed temperature reaches the control
setpoint.
DE
G.
C
U
T
I
N
55
FA
HR
45 50
35 40
25 30
C
U
T
DE 15 20 OU
G.
FA T
HR
PU
SH
TO
RES
ET
Features:
• Reduces installation cost when temperature sensing point
is located a considerable distance from the motor starter of
an air-handling unit supply fan.
• N100-2509 and N100-2513 respond when any one foot of
the 20 foot sensing element drops below setpoint.
• If used with DPDT P/E Switch, one circuit of P/E can (for
example) open to de-energize a fan motor starter, while the
other circuit closes to initiate an alarm.
Model Chart
Model No.
Description
N100-2509a
15 to 55°F (-9 to 13°C). Pneumatic low limit, manual reset. Differential 5F degrees (2.7C degrees).
N100-2513 a
Same as N100-2509, but automatic reset. Differential 5F degrees (2.78C degrees).
a
All devices require N100-0010, N4-32, or N100-2501 restrictor.
Specifications
Dimensions
3-63/64 H x 4-3/8 W x 2-9/32 D in. (101 x 112 x 58 mm). Note: dimensions do not include coil.
Restrictor
Requires one N100-0010, N-32, or N100-2501.
Typical Applications
M
N100-2513
Restrictor
C
N100-2509
15/55 F
set: 35 F
NO
Wire in series with the unit starter.
Figure 1 Typical Application.
Accessories
Model No.
N4-32
N100-0010
N100-2501
64
Description
Restrictor, 1/4 in. O.D. compression.
Restrictor tee for plastic tubing.
Restrictor, inline.
N100-2511
N100-2511
Pneumatic Liquid Flow Switch
The control port opens on no flow and closes on liquid flow.
Features:
• Used with P/E Switch, reduces installation cost when flow sensing
location is located a considerable distance from the desired electrical
switching point.
• If used with a DPDT P/E Switch, one circuit can be used to stop (or
start) a motor, while the other circuit closes to initiate an alarm.
• Paddles for 1 in., 2 in., and 3 in. pipe included.
Model Chart
Model No.
N100-2511
Description
Pneumatic liquid flow switch.
Specifications
Case
0.062 in. cold rolled steel finish.
Cover
0.028 in. cold rolled steel.
Finish
Gray baked enamel.
Maximum liquid pressure
150 psig (1034 kPa).
Maximum liquid temperature
250°F (121°C).
Minimum liquid temperature
32°F (0°C).
Flow
Signal passes.
No flow
Signal exhausts.
Restrictor
Requires one N100-0010, N4-32, or N100-2501.
Dimensions
4-17/32 W x 4-25/32 H x 2-13/16 D (115 x 121 x 71 mm).
Typical Flow Rates  GPM Required to Actuate Switch.
1 in.
1-1/4 in.
1-1/2 in.
2 in.
2-1/2 in.
3 in.
4 in.a
5 in. a
6 in. a
8 in. a
Closes on
flow incr.
4.2
5.6
7.5
13.7
17.5
27.5
65.0
37.0b
125.0
57.0 b
190.0
74.0 b
375.0
205.0 b
Opens on
flow decr.
2.5
3.5
5.0
9.5
12.0
19.0
50.0
27.0 b
101.0
41.0 b
158.0
54.0 b
320.0
170.0 b
Closes on
flow incr.
9.3
13.3
17.7
27.0
31.0
90.0
120.0
81.0 b
245.0
118.0 b
375.0
164.0 b
760.0
415.0 b
Opens on
flow decr.
9.0
12.5
16.5
25.0
28.5
47.0
122.0
76.0 b
235.0
111.0 b
360.0
135.0 b
730.0
400.0 b
Line Pipe Size
Min. adj.
Max. adj.
a
Flow rates for these sizes are calculated.
b
These GPM figures are for switch with 6 in. paddle. For 4 in. and 5 in. line pipe, the paddle is trimmed.
Typical Applications
Chiller
CHWS
CHWR
N100-2511
Pressure
Switch
C
M
Restrictor
NO
Wire in series
with the unit starter.
Figure 1 Typical Application.
65
N100-4017 (2364-202)
Low Differential Pneumatic-Electric Switch
The pneumatic-electric switch features a SPDT
narrow differential switch which makes it suitable
for use with wide span pneumatic transmitters in
such applications as alarm initiation and outdoor
changeover of heating and cooling functions.
Features:
• Narrow-differential P.E. switch can be used with any type of
pneumatic transmitter to initiate an alarm caused by either
a high or low alarm condition.
• May be wall-mounted or panel-mounted where necessary
to keep wiring runs short.
Model Chart
Model No.
N100-4017
Wholesale
Model No.
2364-202
Description
Low differential pneumatic-electric switch.
Specifications
Setpoint
Adjustable fro 3 to 30 psig (21 to 207 kPa).
Switch action
SPDT.
Switch rating
5A at 125 to 250 Vac.
Differential
Non-adjustable, 0.25 psig (1.7 kPa) (lowest setpoint) to 0.7 psig (3.4 kPa) (highest setpoint).
Air signal pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (refer. EN-123).
Maximum overpressure
200 psig (1380 kPa) above setpoint.
Connections
Air
1/8 in. MPT.
Electrical
Coded screw terminals.
Environment
Locations
NEMA 1.
Case
1/2 in. conduit connection.
Mounting
Wall or panel.
Dimensions
4-3/8 x 3-1/2 x 2-13/16 in. (111 x 39 x 71 mm).
Typical Applications
Transmitter
M
N4-32
N100-4017
C
NO
Wire to initiate alarm
on temperature increase
Figure 1 Typical Application.
66
N100-4017
(2364-202)
N800-0555 Series
Positive Positioning Relay
The N800-0555 is used with M556 (6 in. stroke),
M573 (3 in. stroke), and M574 (4 in. stroke) damper
actuators.
The N800-0555 is pilot-operated, providing
excellent response to small signal pressure
changes from the controller.
Pilot-operation also provides maximum resistance
to actuator shaft displacement caused by outside
force changes.
N800-0555
Series
Features:
A built-in adjustable needle-valve permits setting the desired
rate of actuator movement, helpful in two ways:
• Various size actuators operated by the same control signal
can be made to operate at approximately the same rate of
movement, since the smaller actuators can be slowed to
match the rate of movements of larger actuators. One
example: Outdoor, return and relief dampers of
Air-Handling-Units, where the return damper is frequently
smaller, and has a smaller actuator.
• Some rapidly changing processes are easier to control if
the actuator moves slowly. Examples:
- Duct static-pressure control.
- Duct air-velocity control.
- Control of the mixed-air-temperature of air-handling
units, where the mixed-air-temperature changes instantly
as the dampers change position. Since no sensor
responds instantly, more stable control can be attained if
the dampers move slowly. This, in turn, may allow use of
a narrower controller throttling range.
Actuators may be ordered with positioners mounted. For
field-mounting, feedback arm and spring must be ordered
separately. Refer to Model Chart.
Model Chart
Model No.
Description
N800-0555-BOX
Positioner only.
N800-0555-P
Positioner kit. Includes one positioner, one feedback arm, and 5 and 10 psi feedback springs for M556 (6 in.
stroke), M573 (3 in. stroke), and M574 (4 in. stroke).
67
N800-0555 Series
Model Chart (Continued)
Feedback Springs.
Positioner Feedback Spring Selection
Actuator Stroke
Part No.
3 in.
M573 Series
4 in.
For Span of:
Model No.
3 psi
N800-2277
5 psi
N800-2257
M574 Series
6 in.
M556 Series
10 psi
N800-2267
3 psi
N800-2278
5 psi
N800-2258
10 psi
N800-2268
3 psi
N800-2279
5 psi
N800-2259
10 psi
N800-2269
Positioner Kits.a
Wholesale Kit
No.
For Span of:
2850-028
Model No.
Wholesale Model No.
3 in.
M573 Series
2473 Series
4 in.
M574 Series
2474 Series
6 in.
M556 Series
2466 Series
3 psi
2850-017
5 psi
2850-018
10 psi
2850-019
5 psi
2850-020
10 psi
2850-031
3 psi
2850-053
5 psi
2850-054
10 psi
a
Actuator
Actuator
Stroke
Includes one positioner, one feedback arm, and one feedback spring.
Specifications
Environment
68
Ambient Temperature Limits
-20 to 140°F (-29 to 60°C).
Supply Air Pressure
Clean, dry, oil-free air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (136 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air Consumption
30 scim (8 mL/s).
P301 Series (2301 Series)
Pressure Transmitters
The pneumatic pressure transmitters are designed to measure either air
or fluid pressures. All models transmit a fixed-span, 3 to 15 psig output
signal proportional to input pressure to controlling and indicating devices
such as receiver-controllers, receiver gauges, and certain pneumatic
relays and alarm devices. These transmitters are available in various
pressure ranges to meet most control system application requirements.
Features:
• Single-input pressure transmitter permits remote readout on receiver gauge, and
control of air, water, steam or refrigerant pressure from a convenient location.
• Three different ranges permit proper match of transmitter range to application.
• Quality design and construction assure linearity and responsiveness.
• Factory-adjusted span and “zero”.
• Field-assemble “zero” adjustment.
P301
Series
(2301
Series)
Model Chart
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
Maximum Safe Pressure (psig)
-10 to +40
0 to 150
0 to 300
65
185
350
2301-040a
2301-150a
2301-300a
P301-040
P301-150
P301-300
a
Input Pressure Range (psig)
Includes one each 2”, 2-1/2” and 3-1/2” gauge overlay in the appropriate range.
Specifications
Output
Control Action
Maximum ambient temperature
Supply air pressure
Nominal
Maximum
Connections
Air consumption
Air capacity
Adjustments
Calibration
Mounting
Dimensions
Weight
3 to 15 psig.
Direct, proportional.
140°F (60°C).
Clean, dry, oil free air required (refer. EN-123).
20 psig ±0.5 psig.
30 psig.
Two 1/8 in. -27 FNPT.
27.7 scim (7.5 mL/s).
48 scim.
Minor “zero” adjustment only.
None; factory calibrated.
External mounting ears are provided for easy mounting to panels or ducts.
2-5/8 H x 3-1/16 W x 1-3/4 D in. (66 x 78 x 45 mm).
15 oz.
Accessories
Model No.
N4-32
N100-0010
N100-2501
—
—
—
Wholesale Model No.
20-944
21-038
21-153
2890-001
2890-002
2890-003
Description
Tee restrictor for copper or plastic tubing.
Tee restrictor for plastic tubing.
In-line restrictor.
2” overlay kit.
2-1/2” overlay kit.
3-1/2” overlay kit.
Typical Applications
M
Figure 1 Typical Piping Diagram.
M
1
To Final
Control Device
N100-0010
B
M
S
R
C
P541
Receiver Controller
P301
Pressure
Transmitter
1 Receiver Gauge scale to match Transmitter
69
P323 Series (2323-5xx Series)
Differential or Static Pressure Transmitters
The P323 Series differential or static pressure
transmitters have been designed to sense
differential or static pressure across fans, coils,
filters, or between two reference points and to
transmit a 3 to 15 psig signal to controlling and
indicating devices such as receiver controllers,
receiver gages, and sensitive pressure switches.
These devices are one-pipe transmitters which
require an external restrictor in the supply line.
Their design features pneumatic feedback, which
ensures accuracy and stability over the entire
operating range. Mounting ears are provided for
strain-free mounting on ducts or other flat
surfaces.
Features:
• Permits remote readout and control of differential or static
pressure of air.
• Five different ranges permit proper match of transmitter
range to various applications.
• Ball-in-seat pneumatic feedback assures linearity and
responsiveness.
• Field-accessible “zero” adjustment.
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Range W.C. (Pa)
P323-0025
2323-505a
-0.05 to +0.20 in. (-12.45 to 49.8)
P323-01
2323-503a
-0.5 to +0.5 in. (124.5 to 124.5)
P323-101
—
0 to 1 in. (0 to 249)
P323-03
2323-500a
0 to 3 in. (0 to 747)
P323-10
2323-504a
0 to 10 in. (0 to 2490)
a
Includes one each 2 in., 2-1/2 in., and 3-1/2 in. gauge overlay in the appropriate range.
Specifications
Control action
Direct, proportional.
Pressure output
3 to 15 psig (20.7 to 103.5 kPa) for stated span.
Environment
Maximum ambient temperature 140°F (60°C).
Locations
Supply air pressure
Nominal
Maximum
Avoid areas with excessive vibration or corrosive materials.
Clean, dry, oil free air required (refer. EN-123).
20 psig (138 kPa).
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Nipples for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene tubing except LO and HI ports which require 3/8 in. O.D.
polyethylene tubing.
Main air consumption
27.7 scim (7.5 mL/s).
70
P323
Series
(2323-5xx
Series)
P323 Series (2323-5xx Series)
Specifications (Continued)
Air capacity
48 scim.
Calibration
Factory set.
Mounting
Transmitter must be mounted in a horizontal position with the correct side up.
Dimensions
5-9/16 H x 5-5/16 W x 2-11/16 D in. (141 x 135 x 69 mm).
Weight
0.5 lb (227 g).
Accessories
Model No.
A251-1
A252
A253-12
AP-302
AP-305
N4-32
N100-0010
N100-2501
Wholesale Model No.
A253-12
2422-002
2422-003
—
—
20-944
21-038
21-153
Description
2-1/2 in. gauge.
3-1/2 in. gauge.
2 in. gauge.
Static pressure sensing tip  1/4 in. O.D. tubing.
Static pressure sensing tip, 1/8 in. pipe thread.
Tee restrictor for copper or plastic tubing.
Tee restrictor for plastic tubing.
In-line restrictor.
Receiver Gauge Overlays
Model No.
23-63
24-63
25-63
23-62
24-62
25-62
23-64
24-64
25-64
24-66
25-66
23-92
24-92
Wholesale Model No.
—
21-768
21-773
21-763
21-767
21-772
21-765
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
2 in. 0 to 3 in.
2-1/2 in. 0 to 3 in.
3-1/2 in. 0 to 3 in.
2 in. -0.5 to +0.5 in.
2-1/2 in. -0.5 to +0.5 in.
3-1/2 in. -0.5 to +0.5 in.
2 in. 0 to 10 in.
2-1/2 in. 0 to 10 in.
3-1/2 in. 0 to 10 in.
3-1/2 in. -0.05 to +0.20 in.
3-1/2 in. -0.05 to +0.20 in.
2 in. 0 to 1 i n.
2-1/2 in. 0 to 1 in.
Typical Applications
Low
M
M
To Control Device
N100-0010
B
M
S
R
C
P541
Receiver Controller
Filter
LO
S
Air
Flow
HI
High
P323 Series
Pressure
Transmitter
Figure 1 Differential Pressure Transmitter Application.
To Reference
M
M
To Control Device
N100-0010
B
M
S
R
C
P541
Receiver Controller
Air
Flow
LO
S
HI
P323 Series
Pressure
Transmitter
Figure 2 Static Pressure Transmitter Application.
71
P541 Series (2341-5xx Series)
P541
Series
(2341-5xx
Series)
PNEUMODULAR  Receiver Controller
The receiver controllers are used with remote
pneumatic transmitters to provide proportional
control in pneumatic control systems. They are
designed primarily for use with pneumatic
transmitters; however, they may be used with any
pneumatic device having an output of 3 to 15 psig,
such as thermostats or humidistats. Both direct
and reverse acting models are available and each
device is of the dual-input type, with remote
setpoint capability. These devices may be used as
single input devices by using only the desired
input.
Receiver-Controller
Features:
• Nozzle and flapper relay- type receiver-controller; linear,
stable and responsive. Three inputs for primary, reset, and
remote control point adjustment (may be used with one or
two inputs).
• Slide-type throttling range and authority adjustments are
easy to use, require no tools. Easy setpoint calibration.
• Five barbed connections for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
• Setpoint dials available to match transmitter ranges.
• Available in direct-acting and reverse-acting models.
• Direct-acting models have a built-in low-limit feature.
Reverse-acting models have a built-in high-limit feature.
• Designed for mounting on PNEUMODULAR Socket
MCS-S; may be mounted as stand-alone controller with
K504 Mounting Bracket or P541-BASE.
20
25
0
50
60
70
40
80
30
90
100
20
10
0
F
Receiver-Controller Mounted on Base
(gauges ordered separately)
Model Chart
Kits.
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Action
Description
P541
2341-501
Direct
Direct Acting Receiver Controller only
P541-RA
2341-502
Reverse
Reverse Acting Receiver Controller only
P541-DA-B
2341-521
Direct
Direct Acting Receiver Controller (P541) mounted to a Base P541-BASE
P541-RA-B
2341-522
Reverse
Reverse Acting Receiver Controller (P541-RA) mounted to a Base P541-BASE
P541-BASE
—
Not applicable Mounting Base, Gasket and Mounting Screws
Setpoint Dial Labels (order separately).
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Fahrenheit
Wholesale
Model No.
Celsius
300-37



300-39

4 to 60°C
40 to 240°F
300-38

4 to 116°C
50 to 90°F
300-41

10 to 32°C


300-25
21-450
0 to 100°F
300-26
21-451
-40 to 160°F
300-27
21-452
40 to 140°F
300-28
21-453
300-29
21-454
300-31
21-456
-25 to 125°F
72
Model No.
-18 to 38°C


P541 Series (2341-5xx Series)
Setpoint Dial Labels (order separately, continued).
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Range
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Range
300-33
21-458
0 to 2 in. W.C.
300-58
21-884
0 to 300 psig
300-34
21-459
0 to 7 in. W.C.
300-70
21-889
0 to 50 psig
300-35
21-460
30 to 80% R.H.
300-71

300-46
21-790
-0.5 to +0.5 in. W.C.
300-72
21-890
0 to 100 psig
0 to 100% R.H.
300-95

0 to 1.0 in. W.C.
300-80
21-891
0 to 2000 FPM
300-47
21-791
0 to 3 in. W.C.
300-81

0 to 3000 FPM
300-48
21-792
0 to 10 in. W.C.
300-82

0 to 4000 FPM
300-52
21-793
30 to 80°F
300-83
21-894
0 to 5500 FPM
300-54
21-881
-0.05 to +0.2 in. W.C.
300-84

0 to 3.45 Bar
300-56

-10 to 40 psig
300-86

50 to 100°F
300-57

0 to 150 psig
Specifications
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Control action
Direct acting or reverse acting, determined by model selection.
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required.
Normal
4 to 22 psig (28 to 152 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air consumption
36 scim (9.8 mL/s), maximum.
Air flow capacity
13824 scim (3774 mL/s).
Connections
Barbed nipples for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Authority
Adjustable; 10 to 300% of primary signal input.
Reset action
Port R (reset signal) provides reverse reset. To obtain direct reset requires P541-RA with 60%
authority and 40% throttling range to reverse the transmitter’s 3 to 15 psi signal to 15 to 3 psi.
Throttling range
Adjustable; 2 to 40%/12 psi.
Setpoint
Adjustable; graduated dial with 0.25 psi divisions.
CPA (remote setpoint adjustment)
±10% of primary transmitter span.
Ambient temperature limits
40 to 140°F (4 to 60°C).
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. These devices can also be surface mounted by using
an optional K504 mounting bracket or by ordering with base option.
Dimensions
P541
1-63/64 H x 5-25/32 W x 2-1/4 D in. (50 x 147 x 57 mm).
K504
5-1/2 H x 4-1/2 W x 2 D in. (140 x 114 x 51 mm).
P541-BASE & P541-RA-BASE
3-5/8 H x 5-13/16 W x 3-3/4 (136 x 148 x 95 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
K504
K541
N2-4
N100-0010
N100-2501
N100-2597
MCS-GMF
S510
S511-5
S511-10
Wholesale Model No.
22-152
22-171
20-881
21-038
21-153
900-012
22-139
2390-501
2390-505
2390-510
Description
Mounting bracket.
Cover.
Calibration wrench.
Restrictor tee for use with 1/4 in. polyethylene or 5/32 in. polyurethane tubing.
In-line restrictor.
Calibration kit.
Gauge mounting fitting (for use with K504 Mounting Bracket).
Gradual switch.
Minimum switch position.
Minimum switch position.
73
P541 Series (2341-5xx Series)
Typical Applications
Active Connections.
Port
Connected to
B
Branch output.
M
Main air.
S
Primary signal input.
R
Reset signal input.
C
Control point adjustment.
M
N100-0010
Primary Temperature
Transmitter
3-15 psig
M
N100-0010
Secondary Temperature
Transmitter
3-15 psig
M
Branch Air to
Control Device
B
M
S
R
C
P541
Receiver Controller
1 Remote control point adjust.
M
1
S2
M
B
S510
Gradual Switch
Figure 1 Typical Application.
74
S1
PC-1xx Series
PC-1xx
Series
Pneumatic to Electric Pressure Switches, Two-Position
For on-off control of electrical devices such as air
compressors, fans, pilot lights, etc., by the use of a
predetermined air pressure signal.
Features:
• A variety of Pressure-to-Electric (P.E.) Switches permits
two-position electrical switching from either modulating or
two-position pneumatic signals.
• Models are available with either fixed or adjustable
differentials and with several different switch actions,
permitting selection of the best model for almost any
required application.
• May be wall-mounted or panel-mounted where necessary
to keep wiring runs short.
†
†PC-110 only CSA certified
PC-110 shown
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
PC-110
PC-110
PC-131
PC-131
PC-132
PC-132
PC-151
PC-151
Mounting
Switch
Action
Scale Range
psig (kPa)
Differential
psig (kPa)
Ambient
Temp.
Limits
°F (°C)
Surface or
track
SPDT makes
N.O. contact
to common on
pressure
increase
1 to 20
(7 to 138)
1 to 5 (7 to 34)
adjustable
factory set at
2 (14)
-40 to 150
(-40 to 118)
DPST opens
on pressure
rise
3 to 30
(21 to 207)
1-1/2 to 20
(10 to 138)
adjustable
DPST opens
on pressure
drop
3 to 30
(21 to 207)
1-1/2 to 20
(10 to 138)
adjustable
Surface
3 SPST
opens on
pressure rise
Sw.
Open
Sw.
Fixed
1
6 (41)
1
3 (21)
Max.
Input
psig
(kPa)
Dimensions
in. (mm)
HxWxD
3-1/2 x 3-1/8 x 2-1/8
(89 x 79 x 54)
50
(345)
4-1/4 x 4 x 2-9/32
(108 x 102 x 58)
4-1/4 x 4-1/8 x 3-1/2
(108 x 105 x 89)
32 to 140
(0 to 78)
150
(1034)
3-1/4 x 5-3/8 x 3-1/2
(83 x 137 x 89)
2 and 3 18 (124) 2 and 3 0.5 (3)
Specifications
Case
Metal with 1/2 in. conduit opening.
Diaphragm
Non-metallic, positioned by air pressure changes to actuate switches.
Connections
Air
1/8 in. FNPT, except PC-131 and PC-132 1/8 in. male NPT.
Electrical
Coded screw terminals.
Electrical Ratings
Refer to Electrical Ratings Table.
Location
NEMA 1.
75
PC-1xx Series
Electrical Ratings.
Model No.
PC-110
PC-131
PC-132
PC-151
Volts
(Vac)
FLA
Amps
76
Non-Ind.
Amps
Pilot
Duty VA
24


16
100
120
13.8
82.8
16
650
208
9.6
57.6
9.6
750
240
8.3
49.8
8.3
750

277


7.2
120
12
72
12
208
12
72
12
240
12
72
12
277


12
120
6
36
10
208/240
3
18
8
277


7.2
Accessories
Model No.
For PC-110 only
AK-52582
AD-8953
LRA
Amps
Description
Bracket for track mounting.
Track.
125 at 120/600 Vac
125 at 24/277 Vac
PKSR-9001, PKSR-9002
PKSR9001,
PKSR9002
Differential Pressure Transmitter
For transmitting a fixed span 3 to 15 psig
(21 to 103 kPa) pneumatic signal which is
proportional to a differential pressure being
sensed. The output signal can be used as an input
for receiver-controllers or gauges for differential
pressure indication.
Features:
• Permits remote readout of differential water pressure on
receiver-gauge, and control from a convenient location.
• Provides differential pressure readout on a single receiver
gauge (eliminates need to read two pressure gauges and
subtract one reading from the other).
• Two different ranges permit proper match of transmitter
range to application.
• Field-adjustable “zero” adjustment.
Model Chart
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
Differential Pressure Sensed psi (kPa) Max. Differential Pressure psig (kPa)
PKSR-9001
2302-051a
0 to 50
(0 to 345)
85 (586)
PKSR-9002
2302-101a
0 to 100
(0 to 690)
150 (1034)
a
Includes one each 2 in., 2-12 in., and 3-1/2 in. gauge overlay in the appropriate range.
Specifications
Transmitter
Non-relay.
Construction
Zinc die-cast case, brass fittings.
Sensed medium
Water, air, steam, oil.
Maximum total pressure (any input)
300 psig (2069 kPa).
Zero adjustment
Output to 3 ±1/4 psig (21 ±2 kPa) with input pressures equalized.
Output air signal
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa), span fixed.
Action
Direct.
Environment
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping and storage: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
Operating: 40 to 120°F (4 to 49°C).
Humidity
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
1/8 in. FNPT.
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
27.6 scim (7.5 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
48 scim (13.1 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa).
Mounting
In any position with integral bracket provided.
Dimensions
2-11/16 H x 3-3/4 W x 1-19/32 D in. (68 x 95 x 40 mm).
77
PKSR-9001, PKSR-9002
Accessories
Model No.
A251-1
A252
A253-12
AT-532-098-1-1
AT-532-098-1-2
AT-532-098-1-3
N100-0010
N100-2501
N4-32
Wholesale Model No.
2422-001
2422-002
2422-003
21-038
21-153
20-944
Description
Receiver gauge.
Receiver gauge.
Receiver gauge.
Restrictor tee for 1/4 in. copper compression fitting.
.005" restrictor (Red).
.010" restrictor (Blue).
Restrictor tee for use with 1/4 in. or 5/32 in. I.D. plastic tubing.
In-line restrictor.
Restrictor tee, copper tubing.
Receiver Gauge Overlays
Model No.
23-62
23-63
23-64
23-92
24-62
24-63
24-64
24-66
25-62
25-63
25-64
25-66
Wholesale Model No.
21-763
21-764
—
—
21-767
21-768
—
—
21-772
21-773
—
—
Description
2 in. -0.5 to +0.5 in.
2 in. 0 to 3 in.
2 in. 0 to 10 in.
2 in. 0 to 1 in.
2-1/2 in. -0.5 to +0.5 in.
2-1/2 in. 0 to 3 in.
2-1/2 in. 0 to 10 in.
2-1/2 in. -.05 to +0.20 in.
3-1/2 in. -0.5 to +0.5 in.
3-1/2 in. 0 to 3 in.
3-1/2 in. 0 to 10 in.
3-1/2 in. -.05 to +0.20 in.
Typical Applications
To Receiver
Controller
1
M
N100-0010
Low Input Pressure
S
L
H
High Input Pressure
PKSR-900x
1 Indicates differential pressure.
Figure 1 PKSR-900x Piping Connections.
78
R432 Series (2372 Series)
R432
Series
(2372
Series)
High Pressure Selector Relay and
Low Pressure Selector or Booster Relay
The pressure selector relays are designed for use
in pneumatic control systems where the
application requires the comparison, selection, and
transmission of the higher or lower of two
proportional signals. R432-11 can also be used as
a booster relay.
R432-2
High Pressure Selector
R432-11
Low Pressure Selector
or Booster Relay
Features:
• Relays are non-adjustable.
• Precise repeatability characteristics.
• Small size and light weight allow these relays to be
mounted “in-line”, supported by the pneumatic tubing.
• R432-2 HP Selector may be used with “restricted”
pneumatic signals down to 0.5 SCFH airflow.
• R432-11 may be used as Booster Relay or LP Selector.
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
R432-2
R432-11
Functions
2372-352
Selects the highest of two input
signals.
2372-351
Selects the lowest of two input
signals. Or may be used as volume
booster.
Port Connections
Dimensions
in. (mm)
Port
1-1/8 dia. x 31/32
(29 x 25)
S1, S2
1-3/16 dia. x 1-3/16
(30 x 30)
B
Connected to
Branch output
Input signals
B
Branch output
S
Input signal
M
Input signal (piped to main air when used
as a volume booster)
Specifications
Action
Proportional.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Ambient temperature limits
35 to 140°F (2 to 60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (refer. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig.
Maximum
30 psig.
Connections
Fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Air consumption
When used as a volume booster.
Main port
29.4 scim (8 mL/s).
Signal port
0.2 scim (0.1 mL/s).
Mounting
In-line.
Dimensions
Refer to Model Chart.
79
R432 Series (2372 Series)
Typical Applications
Thermostat
(D.A.)
M
M B
M
M B
M
S
N.O. Heating Valve
B
Thermostat
(D.A.) R432-11 Low Pressure Selector
Figure 1 R432-11 Low Pressure Selector Relay.
M B
M
Thermostat
(D.A.)
M
M
S
To Additional
Heating Valves in
the Same Area
B
R432-11
Booster Relay
N.O.
Heating
Valve
Figure 2 R432-11 Used as Booster Relay.
Thermostat
(D.A.)
M
M B
M
M B
Humidistat
(D.A.)
N.O. Heating Valve
2 to 7 psi
S
M
B
N.C. Chilled Water Valve
8-13 psi
R432-2
High Pressure Selector
Figure 3 R432-2 High Pressure Selector Relay.
80
R435 (2374-401)
R435
(2374-401)
Air Motion Relay
This relay is used to sense suction and/or
discharge pressures across a coil or fan and
control pneumatic damper actuators or valves
piped downstream from this device. By the use of
sensing lines located at a fan suction and
discharge and piped to the low and high ports of
this relay, this device is able to detect whether or
not a fan is operating. This same operation can
also be detected by using one port of the R435 as a
reference port and piping the other port to the fan
suction or discharge providing there is a
differential pressure of at least 0.15 in. W.C.
Features:
• Useful for proving fan-operation pneumatically, without the
use of electrical devices.
• Originally designed for use with Unit-Ventilators, the R435
may be used to operate diverting relays (such as the R504
Series) for Air-Handling Unit Control Systems.
Model Chart
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
R435
2374-401
Description
Air Motion Relay.
Specifications
Pressure output
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa).
Pressure input
Minimum 0.15 in. W.C.(373 Pa) differential.
Environment
Maximum ambient temperature 140°F (60°C).
Locations
Supply air pressure
Avoid areas with excessive vibration or corrosive materials.
Clean, dry, oil free air required (refer. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (103 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
LO/HI Ports
3/8 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Signal
1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Maximum static pressure
12 in. W.C. (2988 Pa).
Main air consumption
27.6 scim (7.5 mL/s).
Air capacity
48 scim. (13.1 mL/s).
Mounting
Transmitter must be mounted in a horizontal position with the correct side up.
Dimensions
5-9/16 H x 5-5/16 W x 2-11/16 D in. (141 x 135 x 69 mm).
Weight
0.5 lb. (227 g).
Accessories
Model No.
AP-302
AP-305
Description
Static pressure tip — 1/4 in. O.D. tubing.
Static pressure tip — 1/8 in. pipe thread.
81
R435 (2374-401)
Typical Applications
Restrictor
M
M B
Room
Thermostat
V
LO S
Airstream
Thermostat
HI
R435
Air Motion
Relay
Control
Valve
Pressure
Sensing Lines
Figure 1 Typical Unit Ventilator Control Application.
82
Damper
Actuator
R436
R436
Air Differential Pressure Switch
The R436 differential pressure switch is a sensitive
and reliable device for remotely sensing the
operation of fans or blowers associated with
ducted ventilating systems, and for sensing static
pressure drop across filters. Pressure differentials
as small as 0.05 in. WG are sufficient to actuate the
SPDT contacts, which in turn operate remote
status indicators, alarms, or control circuits of
other devices.
Features:
• Different setpoint adjustable from 0.05 to 12 in. WG to suit
various applications.
• The R436 is field adjustable over a wide range of
pressures, and is relatively insensitive to temperature
extremes. It is recommended for any differential pressure
application within its operating range.
Model Chart
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
R436
2374-410
Description
Air Differential Pressure Switch.
Specifications
Setpoint
Field adjustable 0.05 ±0.02 to 12 in. (1.3 ±0.5 to 305 mm) WG.
Differential
0.02 in. (0.5 mm) WG with increase to 0.8 in. at higher operating pressures.
Maximum pressure
0.5 psig (3.4 kPa).
Electrical switch
SPDT, 300 VA pilot duty at 115 to 277 Vac; 10A non-inductive to 277 Vac.
Connections
Screw terminals with cup washers.
Sampling line connections
Connectors supplied accept 1/4 in. O.D. rigid or semi-rigid tubing; slip-on tubing adaptors available.
Mounting
Diaphragm vertical.
Conduit opening
7/8 in. diameter for 1/2 in. conduit.
Operating temperature limits
-40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C).
Dimensions
6-1/8 H x 3-7/8 W x 3-1/4 D in. (156 x 98 x 83 mm).
Locations
NEMA 1.
N.C.
C
(common)
Increase
Pressure
N.O.
Figure 1 Switch Action and Terminal Identification.
Accessories
Model No.
AP-302
AP-305
Description
Static pressure sensing tip for 1/4 in. O.D. tubing.
Static pressure sensing tip for 1/8 in. pipe thread.
83
R436
Typical Applications
Diaphragm Connections
Electrical
Refer to figure below. For positive pressure only, connect sampling
line to port E; port F remains open to atmosphere.
Before any pressure is applied to the
diaphragm, the switch contact rests in the
N.C. position (see figure below). Upon
application of sufficient pressure to actuate
the switch, the contact transfers to the N.O.
position. Connect control, status, and/or
alarm circuits, as shown.
For negative pressure only, connect sample line to port F; port E
remains open to the atmosphere.
Two positive samples; connect higher pressure to port E and lower
pressure to port F.
Two negative samples; connect more negative sample to port E;
less negative to port E.
One positive and one negative; positive to port E; negative to port F.
To prove excessive air flow or pressure
C
NC
Status
Alarm
NO
Diaphragm
Positive Only
Lower Negative
Higher Positive
E F
Negative Only
Higher Negative
Lower Positive
To prove insufficient air flow or pressure
Alarm
NC
C
Status
NO
Figure 2 Typical Applications.
84
R470 (2386-601)
R470
(2386-601)
Pneumatic-Electric High/Low Alarm Switch
The switch is used to provide high and low signal
alarm. Two independently adjustable SPDT switches
provide 3 to 15 psig high and low alarm contact
capability in this single device.
Features:
• The R470 has very narrow switching differential, and can be
used with any pneumatic transmitter to set two independent
high and low alarm points within the range of the transmitter.
• It can also be used for other pneumatic applications requiring
separate adjustment of two independently adjustable electrical
switching actions.
• Has two SPDT switches. The switching point of each can be
independently adjusted.
• Must be mounted in enclosure.
Model Chart
Model No.
R470
Wholesale
Model No.
2386-601
Description
Pneumatic-electric high/low alarm switch.
Specifications
Environment
Ambient temperature limits
-30 to 160°F (-34.4 to 71.1°C).
Locations
Avoid areas with excessive vibration or corrosive materials.
Supply air pressure
Control air only; clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) or 3 to 27 psig (21 to 186 kPa).
Maximum
100 psig (689.5 kPa).
Connections
Air
1/4 in. 18 NPT female.
Wiring
Screw terminals.
Setpoint
Adjustable, 1 to 27 psig (7 to 186 kPa). Each switch set independently by a self-locking, slotted
screw.
Switch action
Two single pole, double throw, snap acting switches.
Switch rating
10A at 125/250 Vac, 0.5A at 28 Vdc.
(Note: Not suitable for switching thermocouples or RTD sensors or loads of less than 120 volts.)
Differential (each switch)
Non-adjustable, 0.05 psig (at lowest setpoint) to 0.25 psig (at highest setpoint) (34 to 1.7 Pa).
Mounting
Two lugs with clearance holes for #10 screws. Mounts in any position.
Dimensions
4-3/4 H x 3-1/2 W x 3-1/2 D in. (120 x 89 x 89 mm).
Typical Applications
R470
Figure 1 Typical Application.
M
Temperature
Transmitter
(3-15 psig)
N100-0010
C
NC
NO
Low-Temp Alarm
C
High-Temp Alarm
1 Switches operate independently of each other.
85
R471, R472 (2364-200 Series)
Pneumatic-Electric Switches
The pneumatic-electric switches are used in control
systems requiring conversion of gradual air pressure
changes to positive electrical switching actions. The
R471-1 has a single SPDT switch for switching a single
circuit. The R472-1 has two SPDT switches for switching
two separate circuits simultaneously.
R471,
R472
(2364-200
Series)
Features:
• Fixed-differential P.E. switches permit two-position electrical
switching action from either modulating or two-position
pneumatic signals.
• High current rating: 20 amps non-inductive, 120, 240, 480Vac.
• R471-1 has one SPDT switch.
• R472-1 has two SPDT switches which operate simultaneously.
• May be wall-mounted or panel-mounted where necessary to
keep wiring runs short.
Model Chart
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
R471-1
R472-1
2364-211
2364-220
Description
Pneumatic-electric relay with (1) SPDT switch.
Pneumatic-electric relay with (2) SPDT switches.
Specifications
Environment
Ambient temperature limits
Relative humidity limits
Location
Maximum safe pressure
Connections
Air
Wiring
Setpoint
R471-1 (2364-211)
R472-1 (2364-220)
Switch action
Switch rating (each switch)
Mounting
Dimensions
32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Avoid areas with excessive vibration or corrosive materials.
NEMA 1.
30 psig (206.8 kPa). Clean, dry control air only.
3/16 in. (4.76 mm) nipple for 1/4 in. (6.35 mm) O.D. tubing.
Screw terminals. 1/2 in. conduit openings on both sides of housing.
2 to 25 psig (13.8 to 172.4 kPa). Differential 2.0 psi (13.8 kPa) nominal, fixed.
4 to 20 psig (27.6 to 137.8 kPa). Differential 2.5 to 3.0 psi (17.2 to 20.7 kPa) nominal, fixed.
SPDT
20 amps non-inductive at 120-240-480 Vac. 1 hp at 125 Vac, 2 hp at 240 Vac.
Relay may be mounted in any position.
3-11/16 H x 2-1/2 W x 2-7/16 D in. (94 x 64 x 62 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
6-532
86
Wholesale Model No.
20-684
Description
Diaphragm.
R471, R472 (2364-200 Series)
Typical Applications
Pilot Light (lights when electric heat is on)
N
H
Thermostat
(R.A.)
M
C
NO
NO
C
Wire to energize
electric heating element.
M B
R472-1
Pneumatic Electric
Relay
Figure 1 Typical Application (R472-1 shown).
87
R500 (2351-001)
PNEUMODULAR  Integral Relay with Capacity Tank
R500
(2351-001)
The integral relay is a modulating device used with
a proportional controller in applications where it is
necessary to maintain the value of a controlled
variable within close limits. Integral action added to
proportional control allows the use of a wider
proportional controller throttling range to avoid
hunting while simultaneously minimizing or
eliminating the offset (of the actual control point
from the desired setpoint) that is inherent in
proportional control alone. When integral action is
added to proportional control, the result is
proportional plus integral control, frequently
referred to as PI control or automatic reset.
S2
M
Features:
• Provides pneumatic PI (proportional-plus-integral) control,
when used with pneumatic controllers, or
receiver-controllers, having widely adjustable
throttling-range. (Optimum PI control requires adjustable
throttling-range.)
• Has adjustable integral timing, with minutes-per-repeat
scale.
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-Socket or K502
Mounting Bracket.
B
S1
K500 Capacity Tank
Included with R500
Model Chart
R500
a
Active Connections
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
Port
2351-001a
Connected to
M
Main air
B
Branch output
S1
Input signal from controller
S2
Connects to K500 capacity tank 20 cubic in.
(328 cubic cm)
Includes plastic mounting strap and adhesive backed mounting base.
Specifications
Construction
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
Maximum
88
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
20 psig (138 kPa).
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed nipples for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air consumption
1728 scim (472 mL/s).
Air flow capacity
230.4 scim. (62.9 mL/s).
Calibration
Yes.
Adjustments
Timing of integral action is adjustable from FAST to OFF, with approximate dial marks of 0.2, 0.3, 0.7,
1.0, 5.0, and 15 minutes.
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. This device can also be field mounted by using the
K502 mounting bracket.
R500 (2351-001)
Specifications (Continued)
Dimensions
R500
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 2-9/16 D in. (52 x 48 x 66 mm).
K500
7-1/2 L x 2 Dia. in. (191 x 51 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
K500
K502
TOOL-082
Wholesale Model No.
Description
Replacement timing tank kit.
Optional mounting bracket.
5/64 in. hex wrench.
22-150

Typical Applications
Branch Air
K500 to Control Device
Capacity
Tank
1
M
M
S2
M
M
B
R500
1
S1
B
M
N100-0010
S
R
Temperature
Transmitter
C
P541 (or P541-RA)
Receiver-Controller
Max Air Pressure: 30 psig
Figure 1 Typical Application.
89
R503 Series (2353-5xx Series)
R503
Series
(2353-5xx
Series)
PNEUMODULAR  Diverting Relays
The R503-1 and R503-2 diverting relays are
snap-acting devices with adjustable setpoints.
They are designed for a variety of switching and
interlocking functions in pneumatic control
systems where the application requires one or
more of the following functions: feeding and
exhausting branch lines, diverting a supply line to
either one of two branch lines, or diverting one of
two supply lines to one branch line. The primary
function of these devices is to convert a
proportional pneumatic signal, at a predetermined
setting, into a positive pneumatic switching action.
M
The R-503-3 is a non-adjustable, snap-acting,
signal-comparing diverting relay designed for use
in pneumatic control systems where the
application requires a pneumatic switching
function based on the comparison of two
proportional pneumatic input signals.
NC
NO
C
S
R503-1, R503-2
Shown
Features:
• All R503 Series Relays provide positive two-position
snap-action, provide SPDT pneumatic switching. Require
main air supply.
• R503-1 and R503-2 have setpoint dial with PSIG markings.
• R503-1 has narrow differential; to be piloted by transmitter
signals.
• R503-2 has wide differential; to be piloted by controller
signals.
• R503-3 compares two (usually transmitter) signals;
provides narrow differential switching based on the signal
comparison.
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-Socket or K503
Mounting Bracket.
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Type
Differential
psi (kPa)
Setpoint Range
psig (kPa)
R503-1
2353-501a
0.2 to 0.6
(1.4 to 2.8)
3b to 20
(21 to 138)
R503-2
2353-502a
2 to 4
(14 to 28)
4.5 b to 20
(31 to 138)
0.2 to 0.6
(1.4 to 2.8)
None
adjustable
SPDT
R503-3
2353-503a
Switching Action
Port S at setpoint minus diff.: ports NO and C are connected.
Port S at setpoint: ports NC and C are connected.
Port S2 is approx. 0.3 psi (2.1 kPa) greater than port S:
ports C and NO are connected.
Port S greater than or equal to that at Port S2:
ports C and NC are connected.
a
Includes two plastic mounting straps and adhesive backed mounting plastic.
b
DO NOT SET below this value.
90
Dimensions
in. (mm) H x W x D
4-1/8 x 1-31/32 x 3-9/64
(105 x 50 x 80)
4-1/2 x 1-31/32 x 2-55/64
(114 x 50 x 73)
4-1/8 x 1-31/32 x 3-9/64
(105 x 50 x 80)
R503 Series (2353-5xx Series)
Specifications
Control action
Refer to Model Chart.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required.
Nominal
15 to 25 psig (103 to 172 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed nipples for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene tubing.
Air consumption
29 scim(7.9 mL/s).
Air flow capacity
60 scfh (1.7 scmh).
Adjustments
Knob operates over two revolutions. A moving pointer slide is provided to indicate both inner and
outer scales.
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. These devices can also be surface mounted by using
the K503 mounting bracket.
Dimensions
Refer to Model Chart.
Active Connections
Port
Description
M
Main.
S
Signal.
S2
Signal 2 (R503-3 only).
C
Common.
NO
Normally open.
NC
Normally closed.
Accessories
Model No.
K503
TOOL-082
Wholesale Model No.
22-151

Description
Optional mounting bracket.
5/64 in. hex wrench.
Typical Applications
To Minimum-Position
Switch for O.A., Return
and Relief DAmpers
From Air-Handling Unit
Mixed Air Controller
M
M
N100-0010
M NC NO C
S
R503
Diverting Relay
Temperature
Transmitter
located in
Outdoor Air
Figure 1 R503-1, R503-2 Typical Application.
From Temperature
Controller
To Minimum Position
Switch for Damper Actuators
M
M NC NO C
From Return Air
Enthalpy Transmitter (DA)
S
S2
From Outdoor Air
Enthalpy Transmitter (DA)
R503-3
Diverting Relay
Figure 2 R503-3 Typical Application.
91
R504 Series (2354 Series)
R504
Series
(2354
Series)
PNEUMODULAR  Diverting Relays
The R504 Series diverting relays are snap-acting
devices designed for a variety of switching and
interlocking functions in pneumatic control
systems where the applications may require one or
more of the following functions: feeding and
exhausting branch lines, diverting a supply line to
either one of two branch lines or diverting either
one of two supply lines to one branch line.
M
NC
NO
C
S
Features:
• All R504 Series Relays provide positive two-position
snap-action. No main air connection required.
• Some competitive relays, that are claimed to be
snap-acting, are not.
• R504-1 and R504-2 are the same relay with different
factory settings; provide SPDT pneumatic switching.
• R504-3 and R504-4 are the same relay with different
factory settings; provide DPDT pneumatic switching (switch
two separate pneumatic circuits simultaneously).
• Switching point adjustable with 1/16 in. hex wrench.
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-Socket or K503
Mounting Bracket.
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
R504-1
Switching
Action
2354-501a
Range
psig
Action
4 to 8
Below 4 psig: NO and C are connected.
Above 8 psig: NO and C are connected.
Below 16 psig: NO and C are connected.
Above 20 psig: NC and C are connected.
SPDT
R504-2
2354-502a
18 to 22
R504-3
2354-503a
4 to 8
Below 4 psig: NO and C are connected. NO2 and C2 are connected.
Above 8 psig: NC and C are connected. NC2 and C2 are connected.
R504-4
2354-504a
18 to 22
Below 16 psig: NO and C are connected. NO2 and C2 are connected.
Above 20 psig: NC and C are connected. NC2 and C2 are connected.
DPDT
a
Includes two plastic mounting straps and adhesive backed mounting plates.
Specifications
Control action
Refer to Active Connections Table.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed nipples for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air flow capacity
60 scfh (1.7 scmh).
Adjustments
The differential band (fixed at 4 psig) switch-over point may be adjusted between 4 to 8 psig and
18 to 22 psig respectively by means of 1/16 in. hex wrench.
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. This device can also be surface mounted by using the
K503 mounting bracket.
Dimensions
4-1/8 H x 1-31/32 W x 2-61/64 D in. (105 x 50 x 80 mm).
92
R504 Series (2354 Series)
Active Connections
Port
Description
C
Common.
C2a
Common no. 2.
NO
Normally open.
NO2 a
Normally open no. 2.
NC
Normally closed.
NC2 a
Normally closed no. 2.
S
Input signal.
a
R504-3 and R504-4 only.
Accessories
Model No.
K503
Wholesale Model No.
22-151
Description
Mounting bracket.
Typical Applications
Branch Air to
Control Device
S/W
0 psig Winter
20 psig Summer
Receiver
Gauge
M
N100-0010
M
B
M
M
S
R
C
P541-RA (RA)
Receiver Controller
Cooling Control
NC
NO
C
S
R504
Diverting Relay
B
M
S
R
Temperature
Transmitter
(3-15 psig)
C
P541 (DA)
Receiver Controller
Heating Control
Figure 1 Typical Application.
93
R516 (2360-501)
R516
(2360-501)
PNEUMODULAR  Reversing Relay
The reversing relay is a proportioning device
designed for use in pneumatic control systems
where the application requires the reversing of a
proportional signal from a controlling device. The
R516 branch line pressure decreases in direct
proportion to an increase in input signal pressure
and also amplifies the volume of air available for
the final control device, thereby minimizing system
lag.
S2
M
B
S1
The unit is factory calibrated to decrease the
branch line pressure from 16 psig to 0 psig as the
signal pressure increases from 0 psig to 16 psig.
Features:
• Clearly marked connections eliminate the need to
memorize port numbers: M (Main), B (Branch), and S1
(Input Signal).
• A bias adjustment is provided which can be used to
advance or retard the output signal as required for specific
applications (refer to Figure 2).
• The R516 may be used as part of the PNEUMODULAR,
panel-mounted, modular control system, or individually,
using a K502 manifold backplate and its barbed tubing
connections or MCS-Socket.
• Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
Model Chart
Model No.
R516
a
Wholesale
Model No.
2360-501a
Description
Reversing Relay.
Includes plastic mounting strap and adhesive backed mounting plate.
Specifications
Control action
Proportional  reverses input signal.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Nominal
20 psig (1.38 bar).
Maximum
30 psig (2.07 bar).
Connections
Barbed nipples for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Main air consumption
29.3 scim (8.01 mL/s).
Air flow capacity
230 scim (62.8 mL/s).
Adjustments
Crossover point, factory set at 8 psig (.55 bar) (8 psig input = 8 psig output), field adjustable
2 to 15 psig (0.138 to 1.03 bar).
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S-P socket assembly. This device can also be surface mounted by using
the K502 mounting bracket.
Dimensions
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 2-9/64 D (52.4 x 47.6 x 54.4 mm).
94
R516 (2360-501)
Active Connections
Port Designation
Connected to
M
Main air.
B
Branch output.
S1
Input signal.
Note: S2 port is inactive.
Accessories
Model No.
K502
MCS-S
TOOL-082
Wholesale Model No.
22-150


Description
Optional manifold backplate.
Socket assembly.
5/64 in. hex wrench.
Typical Applications
Room Thermostat
Direct Acting
B
Steam Valve
8-13 psig N.C.
M
M
M
M
C.W. Valve
8-13 psig N.C.
B
S1
R516
Reversing Relay 1
1
Set at 8 psig Crossover
2
On Room Temperature Increase: As thermostat branch (output) pressure
increases from 3 to 8 psig, N.C. steam valve modulates from open to closed
position. As thermostat branch pressure increases from 8 to 13 psig, N.C.
chilled water valve modulates from closed to open position.
Figure 1 Typical Application.
Max. Output 20.5 psig
20
18
16
Output Pressure (psig)
14
12
10
Input/Output Crossover
Point Adjustment
Range
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
8
7
6
6
5
4
4
3
2
2
0
30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8
6
4
2
0
Input Pressure (psig)
Note: Metric conversion: 6.895 kPa = 1psi
Figure 2 Input vs. Output Pressures.
95
R527 Series, R528 Series (2368-5xx Series)
R527
Series,
R528
Series
(2368-5xx
Series)
PNEUMODULAR  Electric-Pneumatic Relays
The electric-pneumatic relays are three-way,
two-position, electrically activated air valves for
use in pneumatic control systems where the
application requires a variety of switching,
diverting, or interlocking functions, actuated by an
electrical circuit. The R527 Series switches one
SPDT pneumatic circuit, while the R528 Series are
designed with DPDT pneumatic switching
(switches two independent SPDT pneumatic
circuits simultaneously).
M
NC
NO
C
S
AU
TO
Features:
• R527 Series provides SPDT pneumatic switching (N.C.,
N.O., C).
• R528 Series provides DPDT pneumatic switching (N.C.,
N.O., C), plus (N.C.2, N.O.2, C2). Switches two separate
circuits simultaneously.
• Manual/auto switch (permits control system testing without
starting and stopping electrical equipment).
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Must be mounted on MCS-Socket and
used with MCS-EC electrical connector.
MA
NU
AL
Model Chart
Model No.
R527-24DC
Wholesale
Model No.
2368-500
Coil
Voltage
Switch
Action
24 Vdc
R527-24
2368-501
24 Vac
R527-110
2368-502
110 Vac
R527-230
2368-503
208 to 240 Vac
R528-24DC
2368-520
24 Vdc
R528-24
2368-521
24 Vac
R528-110
2368-522
110 Vac
R528-230
2368-523
208 to 240 Vac
SPDT
DPDT
Specifications
Output
3 to 15 psig.
Action
SPDT models (R527 Series)
Coil de-energized, C and NO are connected. Coil energized, C and NC are connected.
DPDT models (R528 Series)
Coil de-energized, C and NO are connected, C2 and NO2 are connected. Coil energized, C and NC
are connected, C2 and NC2 are connected.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 to 25 psig (138 to 172 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
96
Air
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Electrical
Purchase separately the MCS-EC contact assembly with screw terminals and the MCS-EB electrical
barrier.
R527 Series, R528 Series (2368-5xx Series)
Specifications (Continued)
Air consumption
1728 scim (471.7 mL/s).
Air flow capacity
1728 scim (471.7 mL/s).
Power consumption
2.2 VA.
Adjustments
Auto, manual switch.
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket only.
Dimensions
4-1/8 H x 1-1/32 W x 2-55/64 D in. (105 x 50 x 63 mm).
Active Connections
Port
Connected to
M
Main air.
C
Common.
C2a
Common no. 2.
NO
Normally open.
NO2 a
Normally open no. 2
NC
Normally closed.
NC2 a
Normally closed no. 2.
a
DPDT models only.
NOTE: A loss of main air pressure will have the same effect as de-energizing the coil.
Accessories
Model No.
MCS-EC
MCS-EB
Wholesale Model No.
22-122
22-136
Description
Electrical contact assembly.
Electrical barrier.
Typical Applications
Branch Air to
Control Device
M
M
N100-0010
M
NC
NO
C
Temperature
Transmitter
3-15 psig
M
B
M
S
R
C
P541
Receiver Controller
120 Vac
Wire to Fan Starter
R527-110
Electric-Pneumatic Relay
Figure 1 Typical Application.
97
R532 Series (2372 Series)
PNEUMODULAR  Volume Booster/Pressure Selector Relays
The volume booster relay is a proportioning device
designed for use in pneumatic control systems
where the application requires amplifying the
volume of control air to final control devices.
System transmission lag is minimized by using this
relay in conjunction with a proportional controller
operating several diaphragm valves or damper
actuators. This device may also be used as a low
pressure selector when the application requires
the comparison, selection and transmission of the
lower of two proportional input signals.
The high pressure selector relay is a device
designed for use in pneumatic control systems
where the application requires the comparison,
selection, and transmission of the higher of two
proportional input signals.
S2
S2
M
B
B
S1
R532-L
2372-501
S1
R532-H
2372-502
Features:
• Both models have barbed fittings.
R532-H
• Two-input high pressure selector; no adjustments.
• All ports clearly labeled.
• Not for use with “restricted” signals (use R432-2).
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-Socket or K502
Mounting Bracket. Due to light weight, may be mounted
“in-line”, supported by tubing.
R532-L
• 1:1 booster relay with adjustable bias.
• May be used as low pressure selector (using ports S-1 and
M).
• Using S-1 and S-2 inputs (and main air supply at M) may
be used as summation (adding) relay.
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-Socket or K502
Mounting Bracket.
Model Chart
Model No.
R532-H
R532-L
Wholesale
Model No.
2372-502a
2372-501a
Port Connections
Description
Port
High pressure selectorb
Volume booster or low pressure selector
Connected to
B
Output
S1
Input signal no. 1
S2
Input signal no. 2
M
Main air or input signal no. 2
B
Branch output
S1
Input signal no. 1
a
Includes plastic mounting strap and adhesive backed mounting plate.
b
CAUTION: Do not use signals from a low volume signal source such as transmitters, one pipe thermostats, or R77 Series controllers. Use R432-2 for
these applications.
98
R532
Series
(2372
Series)
R532 Series (2372 Series)
Specifications
Control action
Proportional.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
R532-H maximum
25 psig (172 kPa).
R532-L maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed nipples for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Main air consumption
29.4 scim (8 mL/s) (applies to R532-L when used as a volume booster only).
Air flow capacity
230 scim (62.8 mL/s).
Adjustments
R532-L
Output may be advanced or retarded ±5 psi (34.5 kPa).
R532-H
None.
Mounting
On MCS-S manifold socket. For non-manifold mounting use K502 mounting bracket.
Dimensions
R532-H
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 61/64 D in. (52 x 48 x 25 mm).
R532-L
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 2-33/64 D in. (52 x 48 x 64 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
K502
TOOL-082
Wholesale Model No.
22-150

Description
Optional mounting bracket.
5/64 in. hex wrench.
Typical Applications
Zone-A Thermostat
(D.A.)
V
M B
Zone-B
M B Thermostat
(D.A.)
M
M
S2
B
Cooling
Control
Valve
N.C.
S1
R532-H
Highest Pressure Selector Relay
Figure 1 R532-H Typical Application.
Zone-A Thermostat
(D.A.)
V
M B
Zone-B
M B Thermostat
(D.A.)
M
M
M
B
Heating
Control
Valve
N.O.
S1
R532-L
Lowest Pressure Selector Relay
Figure 2 R532-L Typical Application.
99
R533 (2373-501)
PNEUMODULAR  Multi-Input High and Low Selector Relay
The selector relay is a device designed for use in
pneumatic control systems where the application
requires the comparison, selection, and
transmission of the highest and/or the lowest of up
to six pneumatic input signals. All input ports are
“dead-ended” and no signal air passes through the
relay to the output ports.
M
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
H
Features:
• Six-input high and low pressure selector. Requires main air
connection.
• Highest of 6 inputs is output at Port H.
• Lowest of 6 inputs is output at Port L.
• Inputs numbered 1 through 6.
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on two MCS-Socket(s) or on
one K502 Mounting Bracket.
Model Chart
Port Connections
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
Port
2373-501a
R533
M
Main air
L
Lowest branch output
H
1 through 6
a
Connected to
Highest branch output
Input signals
Includes two plastic mounting straps and adhesive backed mounting plates.
Specifications
Action
Proportional.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air consumption
43 scim (11.8 mL/s).
Air flow capacity
HI output port
14.4 scim (3.9 mL/s).
LO output port
28.8 scim (7.8 mL/s).
Adjustments
None.
Mounting
Designed for use on two MCS-S manifold sockets. This device can also be mounted by using the
optional K502 mounting bracket.
Dimensions
2 H x 4 W x 1-17/64 D in. (51 x 102 x 32 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
K502
100
Wholesale Model No.
22-150
Description
Optional mounting bracket.
R533
(2373-501)
R533 (2373-501)
Typical Applications
Zone 4 Thermostat
(Typical) D.A.
M
M
2
Zone 4
M B
M
Damper Motor
(Typical)
Zone Damper (Typical) 1
Zone Zone Zone
1
2
3
1
2
3
To Hot Deck Controller Reset 3
To Cold Deck Controller Reset
4
5
6
L
H
R533
High/Low Selector Relay
1
Hot Deck: N.O.
Cold Deck: N.C.
2
If all 6 inputs are not used, and if the low (L) output is used,
connect the last used input to the remaining unused inputs.
This keeps the low (L) output from reading "zero".
If only the high (H) output is used, it is not necessary to
connect the unused inputs.
3
If either output (L or H) must operate valve or damper
actuators, use an R532-L volume-booster relay to
increase air capacity for that output on a 1:1 basis.
Figure 1 Typical Application.
101
R534 (2379-501)
R534
(2379-501)
PNEUMODULAR  Signal Repeating Relay
The signal repeating relay is a proportioning device
for use in pneumatic control systems where it is
desirable to repeat a pneumatic signal accurately,
such as the output signal from a pneumatic
transmitter which must be transmitted to receiver
controllers or indicators at multiple locations. In
addition to accurately repeating the input signal,
use of the relay minimizes transmission lag by
increasing the volume of signal air to devices
located remotely from transmitter (see Figure 1).
S
V
B
This device may also be used as a signal blocking
relay and as a signal limiting relay.
Features:
• Signal-repeating relay; repeats transmitter signal to
multiple pneumatic devices at remote locations. No
adjustments.
• May be used for signal-blocking applications.
• May be used with two adjustable restrictors as High/Low
Signal-Limiting Relay.
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-S Socket or K502
Mounting Bracket.
Model Chart
Model No.
R534
Wholesale
Model No.
2379-501
Port Connections
Port
Connected to
S
Input signal
B
Branch output
V
Vent
Specifications
Operation
Signal repeating application
Blocking application
Construction
Maximum ambient temperature
Supply air pressure
Nominal
Maximum
Connections
Air consumption
Air flow capacity
Adjustments
Mounting
Dimensions
102
Restricted main air at port B will accurately track the input pressure at port S.
With no air pressure applied at port S, ports V and B are connected. With air pressure at port S, ports
V and B are blocked.
Glass-filled nylon.
140°F (60°C).
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
20 psig (138 kPa).
30 psig (207 kPa).
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
1728 scim (7.9 mL/s).
1728 scim (7.9 mL/s).
None.
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. This device can also be mounted by using the K502
mounting bracket.
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 61/64 D in. (52 x 48 x 24 mm).
R534 (2379-501)
Accessories
Model No.
K502
N4-150
N100-2501
N100-46
N100-0010
Wholesale Model No.
22-150
22-145
21-153
20-802
21-038
Description
Optional mounting bracket.
Adjustable restrictor.
28.8 scim restrictor.
Adjustable restrictor.
Restrictor tee, polyethylene tubing.
Typical Applications
M
M
(3-15 psig)
Vent
N100-0010
Temperature
Transmitter
(3-15 psig)
Located in Outdoor Air
(at Mechanical Equipment
Room No. 1)
S
V
Repeated Signal
to multiple devices
in M.E. Room No.2
B
R534
Located in Mechanical
Equipment Room No. 2
M
(3-15 psig)
Vent
S
To other Mechanical
Equipment Rooms
V
B
R534
Located in Mechanical
Equipment Room No. 3
Repeated Signal
to multiple devices
in M.E. Room No.3
Figure 1 Typical Application.
103
R537 (2375-501)
R537
(2375-501)
PNEUMODULAR  Summation Relay
The summation relay is a proportioning device for
use in pneumatic control systems where the
application requires the addition of two pneumatic
signals. The branch line pressure increases in
direct proportion to the sum of the two input
signals and amplifies the volume of air available for
the final control device, thereby minimizing system
lag.
S2
M
B
S1
Features:
• Using S-1 and S-2 inputs, with main air on port M, the
R537 operates as a summation (adding) relay; output is
equal to the sum of the two inputs.
• May be used as a low pressure selector (with inputs to
ports S-1 and M).
• May be used as 1:1 booster relay with adjustable bias.
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-Socket or K502
Mounting Bracket.
Model Chart
Port
2375-501a
R537
a
Port Connections
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
Connected to
M
Main air
B
Branch output
S1
Input signal no. 1
S2
Input signal no. 2
Includes plastic mounting strap and adhesive backed mounting plate.
Specifications
Action
Proportional.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air consumption
28.8 scim (7.9 mL/s).
Air flow capacity
230.4 scim (62.9 mL/s).
Adjustments
Output biased ±10 psi.
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. This device can also be mounted by using the optional
K502 mounting bracket.
Dimensions
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 2-33/64 D in. (52 x 48 x 64 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
K502
TOOL-082
104
Wholesale Model No.
22-150

Description
Optional mounting bracket.
5/64 in. hexhead wrench.
R537 (2375-501)
Typical Applications
Branch Air to Control Device
(S1 + S2) ± BIAS
Input
Signal #2
S2
Input
Signal #1
M
M
B
S1
R537 Summation Relay
Figure 1 Typical Application.
105
R539 (2378-501)
R539
(2378-501)
PNEUMODULAR  2:1 Ratio Amplifying Relay
The amplifying relay is a proportioning device
designed for use in pneumatic control systems
where the application requires the amplification of
a proportional signal from a controlling device. The
relay’s branch line pressure output increases as a
2:1 ratio to the input signal pressure (up to main air
pressure) and amplifies the volume of air available
to the final control device, thereby minimizing
system lag.
S2
M
B
S1
Features:
• 2:1 signal amplifying relay, with adjustable bias. Output
changes are equal to input changes multiplied by two.
• Ideal for applications such as:
- Operating two actuators, that have the same spring
range, in sequence (using two R539s and their bias
adjustments).
- Narrowing the throttling range of any pneumatic
controller (or portion of an operating sequence) by a
factor of two.
- Factory set for 10 psig branch pressure at 5 psig input
pressure at port S1.
• All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-Socket or K502
Mounting Bracket.
Model Chart
Model No.
Port Connections
Wholesale
Model No.
Port
M
R539
a
2378-501a
Connected to
Main air
B
Branch output
S1
Input signal
Includes plastic mounting strap and adhesive backed mounting plate.
Specifications
Action
Proportional output at 2:1 ratio.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air consumption
28.8 scim (7.9 mL/s).
Air flow capacity
230.4 scim (62.9 mL/s).
Adjustments
Bias can be manually adjusted from +5 to -13 psig by means of TOOL-082 (5/64 in. hexhead
wrench).
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. This device can also be mounted by using the optional
K502 mounting bracket.
Dimensions
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 2-33/64 D in. (52 x 48 x 64 mm).
106
R539 (2378-501)
Accessories
Model No.
K502
TOOL-082
Wholesale Model No.
22-150

Description
Mounting bracket.
5/64 in. hexhead wrench.
Typical Applications
1
Thermostat
M B
M
M
Branch Air to Other
Controlled Devices
M
B
S1
R539
Amplifying Relay
1 Branch (output) air to portion of control system
requiring pressure changes at twice the rate of
thermostat output pressure change.
Figure 1 Typical Application.
107
R540 (2376-501)
R540
(2376-501)
PNEUMODULAR  Averaging Relay
The averaging relay is a proportional device
designed for use in pneumatic control systems
where the application requires operation of a final
control device, or some other control action such
as resetting a receiver controller, by the average of
the signals from two pneumatic devices. The relay
also amplifies the volume of air available to the
control device, thereby minimizing system lag.
S2
M
B
S1
Features:
• Averaging relay (with adjustable bias, factory set to zero).
Output equals the sum of the two inputs (S-1 and S-2),
divided by two.
• Unlike some competitive bleed-type “averaging relays”
(accurate only when the two inputs are equal, and whose
accuracy decreases as the square of the signal difference),
the R540 is a true averaging relay.
• All ports are clearly labeled. Ports align with MCS-S
terminals.
• PNEUMODULAR: Mounts on MCS-Socket or K503
Mounting Bracket.
Model Chart
Model No.
R540
a
Port Connections
Wholesale
Model No.
Port
2376-501a
Connected to
M
Main air
B
Branch output
S1
Input signal no. 1
S2
Input signal no. 2
Includes plastic mounting strap and adhesive backed mounting plate.
Specifications
Action
Proportional.
Construction
Glass-filled nylon.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air consumption
28.8 scim (7.9 mL/s).
Air flow capacity
230.4 scim (62.9 mL/s).
Adjustments
Output may be advanced or retarded ±10 psig (69 kPa) by means of TOOL-082 (5/64 in. hexhead
wrench).
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. This device can also be mounted by using the optional
K502 mounting bracket.
Dimensions
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 2-33/64 D in. (52 x 48 x 64 mm).
108
R540 (2376-501)
Accessories
Model No.
K502
TOOL-082
Wholesale Model No.
22-150

Description
Mounting bracket.
5/64 in. hexhead wrench.
Typical Applications
Branch Air to
Control Device
Zone 1
S1 + S 2
Thermostat
2
D.A.
Zone 2
Thermostat
D.A.
M B
M B
M
M
M
S2
M
B
S1
R540
Averaging Relay
Figure 1 Typical Application.
109
RKS-1001, RKS-2001, RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKS-5001, RKSR-4000
RKS-1001,
RKS-2001,
RKS-3002,
RKS-4002,
RKS-5001,
RKSR4000
Single/Dual Transmitter Input Receiver Controllers
For use in conjunction with remote proportional
transmitters for proportional control of pneumatic
actuated dampers, valves, etc., in air conditioning
systems. The transmitter-receiver-controller
system may be used to control temperature,
humidity, or pressure.
Features:
• Nozzle and flapper relay-type receiver controllers.
• Linear, stable and responsive.
• Models available for one, two or three inputs.
• Mounting provided for two (1/8 NPT) 1-1/2 in.
stem-mounted receiver-gauges and two 1-1/2 in.
stem-mounted pressure gauges.
• Barbed fittings for 1/4 in O.D. plastic tubing.
• Setpoint scales available to match transmitter ranges.
RKS-1001
(Shown without AKS-4 Cover)
RKSR-4000
RKS-5001
Model Chart
Model No.
Description
RKS-5001
RKS-1001
RKS-4002
RKSR-4000
Actiona
Single input
Dual input
Proportional Band
4% to 40% of input transmitter
span adjustable
None
±10% of primary
transmitter span
c
Authorityb
Type
One Pipe
None
RKS-2001
RKS-3002
Remote SPA
None
D.A./R.A.
Two Pipe
±10% of primary
Replacement single transmitter span
or dual input
10% to 200% of primary
(input 1) transmitter span
adjustable
2-1/2% to 40% of primary
(input 1) transmitter span
adjustable
a
D.A. (Direct Acting) factory shipped: increases output pressure on rise in input 1 pressure. Field changeable to R.A.
R.A. (Reverse Acting): decreases output pressure on rise in input 1 pressure.
b
Primary transmitter connects to input 1.
c
Input 2 has a reverse acting reset only. For direct acting the output pressure increases as input 2 increases. For reverse acting the output pressure
increases as input 2 decreases.
Specifications
Receiver-controller
Forced balanced pneumatic amplifier.
Setpoint
Adjustable, °F, °C, in. water, mm water, % relative humidity labels (included with controller).
Proportional band
Field adjustable (refer to Model Chart).
Input signals
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa). Maximum input pressure 30 psig (207 kPa).
Output air signal
0.5 psig (3.4 kPa) to supply air pressure -0.5 psig (-3.4 kPa).
Action
Direct. Field changeable to reverse (refer to Model Chart).
110
RKS-1001, RKS-2001, RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKS-5001, RKSR-4000
Specifications (Continued)
Authority
RKS-3002, -4002, RKSR-4000
Field adjustable (refer to Model Chart).
RKS-1001, -2001, -5001
None.
RKS-5001
Can be used as a 1:1 reverse acting relay to reverse a transmitter signal to obtain direct reset when
used as a signal into input 2 of RKS-3002, RKS-4002, or RKSR-4000.
Ambient temperature limits
Shipping and storage
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C).
Operating
40 to 150°F (4 to 65°C).
Humidity
10 to 98% RH, non-condensing.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Minimum
18 psig (124 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air connections
Tubing
Barb connectors for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Gauge ports
Integral for AKS-6000 Series gauges (except for the RKS-5001).
Air consumption for sizing air compressor
RKS-1001, 2001, 3002, 4002,
RKSR-4000
13.8 scim (3.8 mL/s) plus 41.5 scim (11.4 mL/s) for each transmitter and remote setpoint.
RKS-5001
41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
RKS-1001, 2001, 3002, 4002,
RKSR-4000
16 scim (4.4 mL/s) plus 36 scim (13.2 mL/s) for each transmitter and remote setpoint.
RKS-5001
48 scim (13.1 mL/s).
Cover
Order separately, except RKSR-4000 factory supplied, refer to Accessories. Used when mounting
receiver-controllers remote from cabinet or where susceptible to damage.
Mounting
Upright on surface of wall or panel.
Dimensions
RKS-1001 through 4002,
RKSR-4000
5-23/32 H x 7 W x 4 D in. (145 x 178 x 102 mm).
RKS-5001
4 H x 3-3/4 W x 2-1/2 D in. (102 x 95 x 64 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AD-8953
AKS-4
AKS-5
AKS-1100
AL-362
AT-532-098-1-1
AT-532-098-1-2
AT-532-098-1-3
AT-532-111-1-01
AT-532-111-1-03
AT-539
H53-301
HKS-8065
T53-101
TOOL-095-1
Description
Vinyl mounting track for RKS-5001 only.
Cover for RKS-1001 through 4002 and RKSR-4000.
Cover for RKS-5001.
Remote setpoint adjustors.
Stem mounted back connected 0 to 30 psi gauge.
0.0075 restrictor (white).
.005" restrictor (Red).
.010" restrictor (Blue).
0.0075 tee restrictor for 5/32 in. plastic tubing.
.010" tee restrictor 5/32" tubing
Pilot pressure kit for RKS-1001 through 4002 and RKSR-4000.
Room humidity transmitter.
Enthalpy transmitter.
Room temperature transmitter.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
111
RKS-1001, RKS-2001, RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKS-5001, RKSR-4000
Typical Applications
B1
B1
D.A.
Damper Actuator
D.A.
M
Damper Actuator
M
M
Trans
M
Trans
M
Restrictor Tee
Transmitter
B2
R.A.
RKS-5001
Receiver Controller
B2
Damper Actuator
Transmitter
R.A.
RKS-5001
Receiver Controller
Damper Actuator
1 Only one output is available at a time.
Figure 1 Typical Piping for RKS-5001 Receiver-Controller.
M
Restrictor Tee
M
Secondary
Transmitter
M
Restrictor Tee
To Actuator
B
M
2
1
A
Primary
Transmitter
RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKSR-4000
Receiver Controller
1 Shown with external restrictors for transmitters.
Figure 2 Typical Piping for RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKSR-4000 Dual Input Receiver-Controller
(External Restrictors for the Transmitters).
To
Actuator
Secondary
Transmitter
M
B
M
2
1
A
Primary
Transmitter
RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKSR-4000
Receiver Controller
1 Shown using internal restrictors for
transmitters of Receiver Controller.
Figure 3 Typical Piping for RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKSR-4000 Dual Input Receiver-Controller
(Internal Restrictors for the Transmitters).
NOTES: These apply to all RKS Series Receiver-Controllers:
1.When internal restrictors are used, the transmitter must be located within 200 ft. (61 m) of the receiver-controller.
2.When external restrictors are used, the transmitter must be located within 1000 ft. (305 m) of the receiver-controller,
and the restrictor must be located within 200 ft. (61 m) of the transmitter (preferably at the transmitter’s location).
Remove internal restrictors from receiver-controller and install blocking gaskets.
112
S510, S511 Series (2390 Series)
S510,
S511
Series
(2390
Series)
PNEUMODULAR  Gradual Switches
The S510 gradual switch is designed to allow
manual setting of a desired pressure, up to main air
pressure, where the application requires remote
positioning of final control devices or remote
control point adjustment of a pressure signal is
desired.
S2
M
B
S1
INCRE
A
S
E
The S511-5 and S-511-10 have been designed with
an internal high pressure selector relay, primarily
for use as a minimum position switch for damper
operation when used with actuators having a 5 or
10 psig span, respectively.
Various dial plates are available for each model
with specific switch applications.
Typical S510 or S511
Features:
S510 and S511 Gradual and Minimum-Position Switches can
easily be mounted any of three ways:
• Flush-mounted on panel face. Dial plate locks onto switch
body and is held in place by tightening the mounting nut
from the rear. Provides exposed adjustment.
• Mounted with two screws and MCS-G Gasket to MCS-S
Socket. Provides concealed adjustment.
• Mounted remotely on the various mounting brackets listed.
K511, K512 and K514 “flush-mount” the gradual switches
with or without flush-mounted 2 in. pressure gauges.
• PNEUMODULAR: All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with
MCS-S terminals.
Model Chart
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
Active Connections
Function
Comments
Port
S510
2390-501
Gradual switch
0 to 20 psig output
S511-5
2390-505
Minimum position switch
5 psig span output
S511-10
2390-510
Minimum position switch
10 psig span output
M
B
Connected to
Main
Branch
Specifications
Action
Proportional.
Construction
Case
Glass-filled nylon.
Dial plates
Anodized aluminum.
Knob
Black sunburst plastic.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required.
Nominal
20 to 25 psig (138 to 172 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
113
S510, S511 Series (2390 Series)
Specifications (Continued)
Connections
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air consumption
28.8 scim (7.9 mL/s).
Air capacity
230.4 scim (62.9 mL/s).
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. These devices can also be mounted on a panel face or
surface mounted by using the appropriate mounting bracket (refer to Accessories).
Dimensions
S510
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 3-1/4 D in. (52 x 48 x 83 mm).
S511-5, S511-10
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 3-1/2 D in. (52 x 48 x 89 mm).
Dial Plates for S510, S511-5, and S511-10
Model No.
50-01
50-02
50-03
50-04
50-05
50-06
50-51
50-53
Wholesale
Model No.
Dial Markings
Warmer, arrow  clockwise.
Warmer, arrow  counterclockwise.
Increase, arrow  clockwise.
Increase, arrow  counterclockwise.
0 to 100.
Blank.
10 divisions.
0 to 20 psig.
22-301
22-302
22-303
22-304
22-305
22-306
22-351
22-353
Accessories
Model No.
50-xx
TOOL-082
Mounting Brackets
K511
K512
K514
Wholesale Model No.


Description
Dial Plates (refer to Dial Plates for S510, S511-5, and S511-10 Table).
5/64 in. hexhead wrench.
22-155
22-156
22-157
Single switch bracket.
One switch and one 2 in. gauge bracket.
Two switches and two 2 in. gauge brackets.
Typical Applications
M
Temperature
Transmitter
(3-15 psig)
N100-0010
Branch Air to
Control Device
M
B
M
M
S
R
M
C
P541
Receiver Controller (DA)
B
S510
Gradual Switch
Figure 1 S510 Typical Application.
To E/P Relay and
Damper Actuators
M
M
M
M
B
S1
S511 Gradual Switch
Damper Minimum Position
B
M
N100-0010
S
R
C
Temperature
Transmitter
(3-15 psig)
P541
Receiver Controller (DA)
Figure 2 S511 Series Typical Application.
114
S515 (2390-515)
S515
(2390-515)
PNEUMODULAR  Pressure Regulator
The S515 pressure regulator allows the manual
setting of any desired air pressure, up to main
pressure, where the application requires remote
positioning of final control devices, remote control
point adjustment of receiver controllers, or any
other application where manual setting of an
output pressure is desired.
S2
M
Features:
• Pressure regulator allows any desired pressure (up to main
air pressure) to be set with a 5/64 in. hex wrench.
• Mounts on MCS-S Socket or K502 Mounting Bracket.
• PNEUMODULAR: All ports clearly labeled. Ports align with
MCS-S terminals.
B
S1
S515
Model Chart
Model No.
S515
Wholesale
Model No.
2390-515
Active Connections
Function
Comments
Port
Pressure regulator
0 to main air pressure output
Connected to
M
Main
B
Branch
Specifications
Action
Proportional.
Construction
Case
Glass-filled nylon.
Knob
Black sunburst plastic.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 to 25 psig (138 to 172 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air consumption
28.8 scim (7.9 mL/s).
Air capacity
230.4 scim (62.9 mL/s).
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. These devices can also be mounted on a panel face or
surface mounted by using the appropriate mounting bracket (refer to Accessories).
Dimensions
S515
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 1-61/64 D in. (52 x 48 x 50 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
N100-0010
TOOL-082
Mounting Bracket
K502
Wholesale Model No.


Description
Restrictor tee for copper and plastic tubing.
5/64 in. hexhead wrench.
22-150
Mounting bracket.
Typical Applications
Branch Air to
Control Device
M
M
Figure 1 S515 Typical Application.
B
S515
Pressure Regulator
115
S52x Series, S53x Series, S54x Series (239X-500 Series)
PNEUMODULAR  Two-, Three-, Four-Position Selector
Switches
These switches are manually operated devices
adaptable to a wide variety of applications in
pneumatic control systems. They are normally
used to perform diverting or supply and exhaust
functions to operate final control components or
index relays in multiple switching systems.
1
2
The S520 is a two-position, four-branch switch. The
S521 is a two-position five-branch switch that
provides one blocked port in each knob position.
The S530 is a three-position, four-branch switch
which can be used to supply a signal to any one of
three devices or supply any one of three signals to
a device. Its unused ports are blocked. The S531 is
identical except for its unused ports being
exhausted to atmosphere.
The S540 and S541 are four-position, five-branch
switches which follow the same operating pattern
as the S530 Series. However, they can supply a
signal to any one of four devices or vice-versa.
Unused ports are blocked in the S540 and
exhausted in the S541.
Features:
S520, S530, S540 Series Selector Switches can easily be
mounted any of three ways:
• Flush-mounted on panel face. Dial plate locks onto switch
body and is held in place by tightening the mounting nut
from the rear. Provides exposed adjustment.
• Mounted with two screws and MCS-G Gasket to MCS-S
Socket. Provides concealed adjustment.
• Mounted remotely on the various mounting brackets listed.
K511, K512 and K514 “flush-mount” the gradual switches
with or without flush-mounted 2 in. pressure gauges.
• PNEUMODULAR: All parts clearly labeled. Ports align with
MCS-S terminals.
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Description
S520
2392-504
Two-position, four-branch.
S521
2392-505
Two-position, five-branch (one blocked port in each knob position).
S530
2393-504
Three-position, four-branch (unused ports blocked).
S531
2393-505
Three-position, four-branch (unused ports exhausted).
S540
2394-504
Four-position, five-branch (unused ports blocked).
S541
2394-505
Four-position, five-branch (unused ports exhausted).
116
5
4
3
S52x
Series,
S53x
Series,
S54x
Series
(239X-500
Series)
S52x Series, S53x Series, S54x Series (239X-500 Series)
Dial Plates.
Wholesale
Model No.
Model No.
50-06
Used with
Dial Markings
Blank
22-306

Occup.
Unoccup.


22-311
Min.
Max.


50-13
22-313
Winter
Summer


50-14
22-314
Manual
Auto


50-15
22-315
Auto
Off


50-16
22-316
On
Auto


50-17
22-317
On
Off


Closed
Auto



50-09
S520
S521

50-18
50-19
22-319
Open
Auto

50-20
22-320
Open
Closed


Day
Night



50-23
50-24
22-324
1
2


50-52
22-352
1
2


50-06
22-306
50-32
22-332
1
3

50-37
22-337
Open
Closed

50-38
22-338
Heat
Cool

50-39
22-339
Day
Night

50-45
22-345
Winter
Summer

50-46
22-346
Occup.
Unoccup.

50-47
22-347
On
Off

50-06
22-306
50-48

50-49

Blank
S530
S531
S540
S541
2
Auto
Blank
2
3
4
1
Heat
Vent
Cool
Auto
Specifications
Construction
Case
Glass-filled nylon.
Dial plates
Anodized aluminum.
Knob
Black sunburst plastic with pointer.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
Barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polyethylene or 5/32 in. I.D. polyurethane tubing.
Air consumption
None.
Air flow capacity
1,152 scim (314.5 mL/s).
Adjustments
Knob.
Mounting
Designed for use on MCS-S manifold socket. These devices can also be mounted on a panel face or
surface mounted by using the appropriate mounting bracket (refer to Accessories).
Dimensions
2-1/16 H x 1-7/8 W x 2-7/8 D in. (52 x 48 x 73 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
Wholesale Model No.
50-xx
22-3xx
Mounting Bracket Accessories
K511
22-155
K512
22-156
K514
22-157
Description
Dial Plates (refer to Dial Plates Table).
Single switch bracket.
One switch and one gauge per bracket.
Two switches and two gauges per bracket.
117
S52x Series, S53x Series, S54x Series (239X-500 Series)
Typical Applications
2
From Timer
& E/P Relay
(16 psig day,
25 psig night) M B
16psig
To Final
Control Devices
M
1
2
5
4
1 Selector Switch
with Day-AutoNight Dial
Switch
Position
Ports
Connected
Thermostat Supply Pressure
Day
M 25psig
1
1&5
16 psig
2
2&5
16 psig
3
3
3&5
–
Night
–
25 psig 2
2
25 psig
2 Supplied from an E/P relay controlled by a programmed timer.
1
Figure 1 Automatic or Manual Changeover of Day/Night System.
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
S520
Port 5 blocked
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
S521
Port 1
Port 2
blocked
blocked
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
S530
Ports not connected to 5 blocked
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
S531
Ports not connected to 5 vented
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
S540
Ports not connected to 5 blocked
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
1 2 5 4 3
S541
Ports not connected to 5 vented
Figure 2 Internal Port Connections.
118
1 2 3 4 5
T12 through T33 Series (2211 through 2218 Series)
T12 through
Room Thermostats
T33 Series
2211
These pneumatic room thermostats are designed
hrough
2218 Series) for proportional temperature control of pneumatic
valves and damper actuators to maintain room air
temperatures in heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning systems.
F
12
6
2
Features:
• Small size, approximately 2 x 2 in. (51 x 51 mm).
• Attractive appearance (various metal or ABS plastic covers
available).
• Factory calibrated. S.S. ball-in-seat provides pneumatic
feedback for linear, stable operation.
• Easy-to-use throttling range adjustment and recalibration.
• Adjustable (patented) bimetal shows actual throttling range
in both °F and °C. Adjustable 2 to 12°F (1 to 6.7°C).
• Setpoint (in both °F and °C) shown on thermostat body
with cover removed.
• Leakproof, O-ring sealed, spring-loaded self-closing
branch gauge tap.
• T23, T24, T27, 2214, and 2216 only:
- Separate factory-calibrated night bimetal and setpoint
dial, with fixed 4°F night throttling range for accurate
“night” operation.
- Snap-acting (not gradual) changeover from “day” to
“night” operation and vice versa.
• T27 and 2216 only:
- Third port (R) output with manual reset lever allows full
restoration of day operation (typically, of unit ventilator),
with either manual or automatic reset to day-night
schedule.
• T32, T33, and 2218 only:
- Snap-acting (not gradual) changeover from direct-action
to reverse-action and vice versa.
C
5
2
Model Chart
Model No. a
Wholesale
Model No. b
W/O Dial Limit Stops
T12-301
2211-012
2211-411 c
Model No. a
Wholesale
Model No. b
Dial Range
°F (°C)
With Dial Limit Stops
T12-3011
T12-3081 c
2211-112
2211-512 c
55 to 85
(13 to 29)
T13-301
2211-013
2211-412 c
Air
Consumption
T13-3011
T13-3081 c
2211-113
2211-513 c
0.017 scfm
at 20 psig (0.48
L/m at 138
kPa)
Description
(Refer to Following Pages for
More Detail)
Single temperature, one-pipe, D.A.
T12-3011 same as T12-301, but
has factory-installed
10-59 setpoints stops.
Single temperature, one-pipe, R.A.
T13-3011 same as T13-301, but
has factory-installed
10-59 setpoint stops.
119
T12 through T33 Series (2211 through 2218 Series)
Model Chart (Continued)
Model No.a
Wholesale
Model No.b
W/O Dial Limit Stops
Model No. a
Wholesale
Model No. b
Dial Range
°F (°C)
With Dial Limit Stops
T18-3011
T18-3081c
T18-3091 c
2212-128
2212-518 c
55 to 85
(13 to 39)
T18-301
2212-118
2212-418 c
T18-305
2212-301


35 to 65
(2 to 18)
T18-306
2212-302


75 to 105
(24 to 41)
T19-301
2212-119
2212-419 c
T19-3011
T19-3081 c
T19-3091 c
2212-129
2212-519 c
55 to 85
(13 to 39)


35 to 65
(2 to 18)


75 to 105
(24 to 41)
T19-305
T19-306
T23-301
T24-301
T27-301
120
2212-304
2214-121
2214-122
2216-126
Air
Consumption
T23-3011
T24-3011
T27-3011
2214-131
2214-521 c
2214-132
2214-522 c
2216-136
2216-526 c
15.6 scim
at 20 psig
(4.2 mL/s at
138 kPa)
Single temperature, two-pipe, D.A.,
throttling range adjustable 2° to 12°.
T18-3011 same as T18-301, but
has factory-installed
10-59 setpoint stops.
Single temperature, two-pipe, R.A.,
throttling range adjustable 2° to 12°.
T19-3011 same as T19-301, but
has factory-installed
10-59 setpoint stops.
Day
55 to 85
(13 to 39)
29.4 scim
at 16 psig
(8.0 mL/s at
110 kPa)
Night
50 to 80
(10 to 27)
43.2 scim
at 25 psig
(11.8 mL/s at
172 kPa)
Day
55 to 85
(13 to 39)
29.4 scim
at 16 psig
(8.0 mL/s at
110 kPa)
Night
50 to 80
(10 to 27)
Description
(Refer to Following Pages for
More Detail)
43.2 scim
at 25 psig
(11.8 mL/s at
172 Kpa)
Day
55 to 85
(13 to 39)
29.4 scim
at 16 psig
(8.0 mL/s at
110 kPa)
Night
50 to 80
(10 to 27)
43.2 scim
at 25 psig
(11.8 mL/s at
172 Kpa)
Day-Night Thermostat, two-pipe,
D.A. 16 psig day, 25 psig night.
T23-3011 same as T23-301, but
has factory-installed
10-59 setpoint stops.
Day-Night Thermostat, two-pipe,
R.A. 16 psig day, 25 psig night.
T24-3011 same as T24-301, but
has factory-installed
10-59 setpoint stops.
Day-Night Thermostat, three-pipe,
with manual reset lever D.A. 16 psig
day, D.A. 25 psig night.
T27-3011 same as T27-301, but
has factory-installed
10-59 setpoint stops.
T12 through T33 Series (2211 through 2218 Series)
Model Chart (Continued)
Model No. a
Wholesale
Model No. b
W/O Dial Limit Stops
T32-301
2218-132
Model No. a
Wholesale
Model No. b
Dial Range
°F (°C)
Air
Consumption
With Dial Limit Stops
T32-3011
31.1 scim
at 16 psig
(8.5 mL/s at
110 kPa)
2218-142
2218-532 c
43.2 scim
at 25 psig
(11.8 mL/s at
172 Kpa)
T32-321
T33-301
2218-134
2218-133




55 to 85
(13 to 39)
22.5 scim
at 13 psig
(6.1 mL/s at
90 kPa)
34.5 scim
at 18 psig
(9.4 mL/s at
124 kPa)
29.4 scim
at 15 psig
(8 mL/s at
103 kPa)
34.5 scim
at 20 psig
(9.4 mL/s at
138 Kpa)
Description
(Refer to Following Pages for
More Detail)
Summer-Winter, throttling range
adjustable 2° to 12°.
16 psig Main  R.A., Summer.
25 psig Main  D.A., Winter.
(Can be used with 8 psig summer
main if recalibrated in the field.)
T32-3011 same as T32-301 but has
factory-installed
10-59 setpoint stops.
Summer-Winter Thermostat for use
with Honeywell 13 to 18 psig
Systems.
13 psig Main  R.A., Summer.
18 psig Main  D.A., Winter.
Summer-Winter Thermostat for use
with Johnson main air systems.
25 psig Main  R.A., Summer.
16 psig Main  D.A., Winter.
a
All thermostats include: Two mounting screws.
b
All wholesale thermostats include: One or two 1/4 x 3/16 in. tubing reducer(s), 20-693 tubing, 20-714 wall plate, 20-711 mounting plate, and two mounting
screws.
c
This is a thermostat kit; refer to Kit Model Chart on page 122.
Cover Options
Thermostat covers are available in various styles to meet particular requirements. Cover options include models with setpoint
scale and thermometer, setpoint scale only, thermometer only, or blank. An external setpoint adjustment cover is available with
all models and can be field installed on covers where required.
Covers must be ordered separately, refer to Cover Selection Table on pages page 25.
121
T12 through T33 Series (2211 through 2218 Series)
T-Series Thermostat Kits
Kit Model Chart
Part Number
Parts
T1x-3011
T1x-3081
T1x-3091
2211-41x
2212-41x
2211-51x
2212-51x
2214-52x
2216-526
2218-53x
Description
Thermostat with factory installed dial stop
10-11
Tubing assembly
10-58
Mounting ring
10-77
Adaptor plate
B-262 (was N4-109)
1/4 x 3/16 in. reducer
C3-46
Cover kit
T1x-3011
Thermostat with factory installed dial stop
RC-3-181
Cover insert
C3-42
Cover
N5-95
Thermostat conversion kit
221x-41x
Thermostat
20-714
Wall plate
20-042
Mounting plate and screws
20-693
Tubing
2890-011
Convertible cover
221x-5xx
Thermostat with factory installed dial stop
21-933
Full dial cover with blank cover conversion
22-022
Conversion kit
Specifications
Action
Proportional; refer to Model Chart.
Setpoint range
55 to 85°F (13 to 29°C).
Throttling range
2 to 12°F/12 psi (-17 to-11°C/83 kPa) adjustable, factory set 3°F (-16 °C)(night, 3 to 5°F/12 psi
(-16 to -15°C/83 kPa), non-adjustable).
Construction
Components
Die cast aluminum, stainless steel, and glass-filled nylon.
Diaphragms
Fabric-reinforced neoprene.
Air filter
Internal.
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Refer to EN-123).
Nominal
Refer to Model Chart and Typical Applications.
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
For spring-reinforced 3/16 in. plastic tubing and required fittings. Order separately.
Air consumption
Refer to Model Chart and Typical Applications.
Calibration point
9 psig branch line pressure when ambient temperature equals setpoint (except T32 Series and
T33-301, 12 psig branch line pressure).
Setpoint adjustment
Serrated thumbwheel, external or concealed.
Mounting
Upright position on wall.
Dimensions
2-1/32 H x 2-1/32 W x 1-3/8 D in. (52 x 52 x 35 mm).
122
T12 through T33 Series (2211 through 2218 Series)
Accessories
Model No.
Wholesale Model No.
Description
6-371
20-642
Mounting ring (use with mounting heads).
10-11
20-693
Tubing assembly.
10-15
20-695
Aspirating box, two pipe.
10-53
20-707
Metal thermostat guard.
10-57
20-710
Mortar joint fitting, two tube, copper.
10-58
20-711
Mounting ring (use with N5-52).
10-59
20-712
Internal stop kit.
10-62
20-715
Thermostat guard, clear Lexan (except T27 Series).
10-63
20-716
Insulating backplate, for plastic guards.
10-64

Tubing assembly with eyelets and fittings.
10-66
21-468
Mortar joint fitting, two “FR” tubes.
10-72
21-800
Concealed adjustment cover (black), for metal covers.
10-73
21-473
Drywall mounting fitting (snap-in).
10-76
21-876
Thermostat guard, opaque ABS (except T27 Series).
10-77
20-714
Adaptor plate.
10-78

Insulating backplate.
10-80

Concealed adjustment cover for use with gray ABS cover.
10-81

Concealed adjustment cover, for use with beige ABS cover.
10-82

Mounting plate for 2 x 4 switch box, black.
10-82-SS

Stainless steel mounting plate.
10-82-47

Beige mounting plate.
10-82-48

Euro-white mounting plate.
MCS-GA
22-138
Gauge tap adaptor.
N2-4
20-881
Calibration tool for thermostats, (and P341, P541 and P541-RA).
N5-49
21-065
Adaptor (for use with N5-53).
N5-52
21-068
Bracket, drywall mount (use with 10-58 mounting ring).
N5-53
21-069
Bracket, stud mount rough-in.
N5-95
22-022
Wall thermostat, conversion kit.
N100-0010
21-038
0.017 scfm restrictor tee, red plastic.
N100-2501
21-153
In-line 0.017 scfm restrictor, red plastic.

20-850
Thermostat mounting plate.

22-022
Thermostat conversion kit.

900-002
Thermostat calibration kit.
See Thermostat Covers section starting on page 25.
For additional information, refer to Accessories page 157
Typical Applications
20 psig (Nominal)
M
M
T12 or T13
Thermostat
V
N100-0010
Control Valve
Figure 1 T12 or T13 Typical Application.
20 psig (Nominal)
M
To Final Control
Device(s)
M B
T18 or T19
Thermostat
Figure 2 T18 or T19 Typical Application.
D/
16psig Day
25 psig Night
N
M B
To N.O.
Heating Valve
T23 or T24
Thermostat
Figure 3 T23 or T24 Typical Application.
123
T12 through T33 Series (2211 through 2218 Series)
D/
16psig Day
25 psig Night
R
M B
N
To N.O.
Heating Valve.
1
T27
Thermostat
Manual Override And
Remote Reset
1
Manual override lever.
Figure 4 T27 Typical Two Pipe Application.
To P.E. on unit Ventilator
Subpanel (Typically)
Day 0 psig - Manual 2 psig or less
Night 25 psig
D/
16psig Day
25 psig Night
N
To Unit Ventilator Control
Components (Typically)
R
M B
1
T27
Two-Temperature
Thermostat
Manual Override And
Remote Reset
1
Manual override lever.
Figure 5 T27 Typical Three Pipe Application.
S/
16psig Summer
25 psig Winter
W
M B
T32 Thermostat
Supply
V
Valve
Return
AB
A
B
Unit
Heating/Cooling
Coil
Figure 6 T32 Typical Application.
S/
15psig Winter
20 psig Summer
W
M B
T33 Thermostat
Supply
V
Valve
Return
AB
A
B
Unit
Heating/Cooling
Coil
Figure 7 T33 Typical Application.
124
T34-3011 (2218-301, 2218-534 Kit)
T34-3011 Energy Conservation Summer-Winter
(2218-30
1,
2218-534 This pneumatic room thermostat is designed for
proportional control of pneumatic valves and
Kit)
Room Thermostat
damper actuators in environmental control
systems where a dual pressure air main is utilized
for seasonal changeover of heating and cooling
functions. Its design incorporates a highly
sensitive, bimetal, thermostatic element and a pilot
operated relay with pneumatic feedback for
accuracy and stability over the entire operating
range.
Features:
• Small size: Approximately 2 x 2 in. (51 x 51 mm).
• Attractive appearance (various metal or ABS plastic covers
available).
• Factory calibrated. S.S ball-in-seat provides pneumatic
feedback for linear, stable operation.
• Leakproof, O-Ring sealed, spring-loaded self-closing
branch gauge tap.
• Separate bimetals (and setpoint scales) for heating and
cooling.
• Limited setpoint ranges for energy conservation: 44 to 74°F
(7 to 23°C) for winter (heating) and 76 to 85°F
(24.5 to 29.5°C) for summer (cooling).
• Snap-acting (not gradual) changeover from direct action to
reverse action, and vice versa.
Model Chart
Model No.
T34-3011a
Wholesale Model
No.
Parts

2218-301b
2218-301

2218-534c
Description
Refer to Specifications.
Thermostat
21-933
Full dial cover with blank cover conversion
22-022
Conversion kit
a
All thermostats include: Two mounting screws.
b
All Wholesale thermostats include: One or two 1/4 x 3/16 i n. tubing reducer(s), 20-693 tubing, 20-714 wall plate, 20-711 mounting plate, and two mounting
screws.
c
For details refer to Table , “T-Series Thermostat Kits,” on page 122.
Cover Options
Thermostat covers are available separately in various styles to meet particular requirements. Cover options include models with
setpoint scale and thermometer, setpoint scale only, thermometer only or blank (suggest using blank cover). An external
setpoint adjustment cover is available with all models and can be field installed on covers where required.
Covers must be ordered separately, refer to Cover Selection Table on page 25.
125
T34-3011 (2218-301, 2218-534 Kit)
Specifications
Action
Proportional: R.A. at 15 psig (103 kPa) , D.A at 20 psig (138 kPa).
Setpoint range
44 to 74°F (7 to 23°C) winter (internal); 76 to 85°F(24 to 29°C) summer (adjustable by thumbwheel);
factory installed dial stops.
Throttling range
4°F (-16°C) fixed.
Construction
Components
Die cast aluminum, stainless steel and glass-filled nylon.
Diaphragms
Fabric-reinforced neoprene.
Air filter
Internal.
Supply air pressure
Summer
Winter
Connections
Air consumption
Calibration point
Cover options
Setpoint adjustment
Mounting
Dimensions
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Refer to EN-123).
16 psig (110 kPa).
25 psig (172 kPa).
For spring-reinforced 3/16 in. plastic tubing and required fittings (order separately).
34.6 scim at 16 psig (9.4 mL/s at 110 kPa); 51 scim at 25 psig (14.2 mL/s at 172 kPa).
9 psig (62 kPa) branch line pressure.
See CT-x1, CTR-x1 for cover options (order separately).
Serrated thumbwheel, external or concealed.
Upright position on wall.
2-1/32 H x 2-1/32 W x 1-3/8 D in. (52 x 52 x 35 mm).
For additional information, refer to Accessories page 636.
Accessories
Model No.
Wholesale Model No.
Description
6-371
20-642
Mounting ring (use with mounting heads).
10-15
20-695
Aspirating box, two pipe.
10-53
20-707
Metal thermostat guard.
10-57
20-710
Mortar joint fitting, two tube, copper.
10-58
20-711
Mounting ring (use with N5-52).
10-59
20-712
Internal stop kit.
10-62
20-715
Thermostat guard, clear Lexan.
10-63
20-716
Insulating backplate, for plastic guards.
10-64

Tubing assembly with eyelets and fittings.
10-66
21-468
Mortar joint fitting, with two”FR” tubes.
10-72
21-800
Concealed adjustment cover (black), for metal covers.
10-73
21-473
Drywall mounting fitting (snap-in).
10-76
21-876
Opaque plastic guard.
10-77
20-714
Adaptor plate.
10-78

Insulating backplate.
10-80
21-964
Concealed adjustment cover for use with gray ABS cover.
10-81
Concealed adjuistment cover, for use with beige ABS cover.
10-82
20-850
Mounting plate for 2 x 4 switch box, Black.
10-82-SS

Stainless steel.
10-82-47

Beige.
10-82-48

Euro-white.
MCS-GA
22-138
Gauge tap adaptor.
N2-4
20-881
Calibration tool for thermostats (and P341, P541, and P541-RA).
N5-49
21-065
Adaptor (for use with N5-53).
N5-52
21-068
Bracket, drywall mount. (Use with 10-58 mounting ring).
N5-53
21-069
Bracket, stud mount rough-in.
N5-95
22-022
Wall thermostat conversion kit.
See Thermostat Covers section starting on page 25
For additional information, refer to Accessories page 157
Typical Applications
S/
16psig Summer
25 psig Winter
W
1
M B
T34-3011
Thermostat
V
2
Dual Temperature
Water Cooling/Heating
Valve N.O.
1 Summer/Winter Energy Conservation
Dual Setpoints (Adjustable) —
Summer: 78 F Reverse Acting
Winter:
68 F Direct Acting
2 Summer: Chilled Water
Winter:
Hot Water
Figure 1 Typical Application.
126
T35-301, T36-301 (2212-318, 2212-319)
T35-301,
T36-301
(2212-31
8,
2212-319
)
Dual Setpoint/Deadband Room Thermostat
The dual setpoint/deadband pneumatic room
thermostats are designed for the proportional
control of pneumatic valves, damper actuators, and
other final control devices in environmental control
systems. These devices are for use when it is
desirable to set up a temperature span within
which the HVAC system uses no energy for heating
or cooling between selected heating and cooling
setpoints. The high capacity, two pipe,
pilot-operated relay type design provides
pneumatic feedback for accuracy and stability over
the entire operating range.
Features:
• Attractive appearance (various metal or ABS plastic covers
available).
• Factory calibrated. S.S. ball-in-seat provides pneumatic
feedback for linear, stable operation.
• Deadband is set merely by setting desired heating and
cooling setpoints.
• Deadband output pressure factory set at 8 psig; field
adjustable.
• Leakproof, O-Ring-sealed, spring-loaded self-closing
branch gauge tap.
Model Chart
Model No.a
T35-301
T36-301
Wholesale Model
Parts
No.b
2212-318
2212-319

2212-538c

2212-539c

2212-318
21-928
22-022
2212-319
21-928
22-022
Description
Refer to Specifications.
Thermostat
Blank cover
Conversion kit
Thermostat
Blank cover
Conversion kit
a
All thermostats include: Two mounting screws.
b
All wholesale thermostats include: One or two 1/4 x 3/16 in. tubing reducer(s), 20-693 tubing, 20-714 wall-plate, 20-711 mounting plate, and two mounting
screws.
c
This is a Thermostat Kit; refer to Table , “T-Series Thermostat Kits,” on page 122.
Specifications
Action
T35-301
T36-301
Setpoint range
Heating
Cooling
Throttling range
Proportional, with deadband.
Direct.
Reverse.
57 to 75°F (14 to 24°C).
65 to 83°F (18 to 28°C).
1.5°/5 psi non-adjustable for each setpoint (approximately).
127
T35-301, T36-301 (2212-318, 2212-319)
Specifications (Continued)
Construction
Components
Diaphragms
Air filter
Supply air pressure
Operating
Maximum
Connections
Air consumption
Calibration point
Deadband output
Direct acting T35-301
Reverse acting T36-301
Cover options
Setpoint adjustment
Mounting
Dimensions
Die cast aluminum, stainless steel, and glass-filled nylon.
Fabric-reinforced neoprene.
Internal.
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Refer to EN-123).
20 psig (138 kPa).
30 psig (207 kPa).
For spring-reinforced 3/16 in. plastic tubing and required fittings (order separately).
29.4 scim at 20 psig (8.0 mL/s at 172 kPa) main air pressure.
Factory set at 8 psig (adjustable).
Heating: 4 psig (28 kPa) at setpoint. Cooling: 10.5 psig (72 kPa) at setpoint.
Cooling: 4 psig (28 kPa) at setpoint. Heating: 10.5 psig (72 kPa) at setpoint.
See CT-x1, CTR-x1 for cover options (order separately).
Individual concealed adjustments or heating and cooling by means o N2-4 calibration tool.
Upright position on wall.
2-1/32 H x 2-1/32 W x 1-3/8 D in. (52 x 52 x 35 mm).
For additional information, refer to Accessories page 636.
Accessories
Model No.
Wholesale Model No.
Description
6-371
20-642
Mounting ring (use with mounting heads).
10-15
20-695
Aspirating box, two pipe.
10-53
20-707
Metal thermostat guard.
10-57
20-710
Mortar joint fitting, two tube, copper.
10-58
20-711
Mounting ring (use with N5-52).
10-59
20-712
Internal stop kit.
10-62
20-715
Thermostat guard, clear Lexan.
10-63
20-716
Insulating backplate, for plastic guards.
10-64

Tubing assembly with eyelets and fittings.
10-66
21-468
Mortar joint fitting, two “FR” tubes.
10-72
21-800
Concealed adjustment cover (black), for metal covers.
10-73
21-473
Drywall mounting fitting (snap-in).
10-76
21-876
Thermostat guard, opaque ABS.
10-77
20-714
Adaptor plate.
10-78

Insulating backplate.
10-80

Concealed adjustment cover, for use with gray ABS cover.
10-81

Concealed adjustment cover, for use with beige ABS cover.
10-82
20-850
Mounting plate for 2 x 4 switch box, Black.
10-82-SS

Stainless steel.
10-82-47

Beige.
10-82-48

Euro-white.
MCS-GA
22-138
Gauge tap adaptor.
N2-4
20-881
Calibration tool for thermostats, (and P341, P541 and P541-RA).
N5-49
21-065
Adaptor (for use with N5-53).
N5-52
21-068
Bracket, drywall mount (use with 10-58 mounting ring).
N5-53
21-069
Bracket, stud mount rough-in.
N5-95

Wall thermostat conversion kit.

22-022
Thermostat conversion kit.

900-002
Thermostat calibration kit.
See Thermostat Covers section starting on page page 25.
For additional information, refer to Accessories page 157
Typical Applications
M
M B
T35-301
Thermostat
V
3
Heating setpoint settings range from 2 to 6 psig,
3 to 6 psig, or 3 to 7 psig.
4
Cooling setpoint setting range is 8 to 13 psig.
V
Heating
Valve N.O.
Cooling
Valve N.C.
3
4
Figure 1 Typical Application.
128
T53-101 (2220-053)
T53-101
(2220-053)
Room Temperature Transmitter
The temperature transmitter measures room
temperature and transmits a proportional
pneumatic signal to a calibrated receiver gauge
and/or receiver controller. The device is factory set
to transmit a 3 to 15 psig signal over a 50 to 90°
range.
Features:
• Permits remote readout and control of room temperature.
• Highly sensitive bimetal sensing element.
• Linear response to room temperature changes.
• Small size, attractive appearance.
• Matches appearance of T-Series 2 x 2 in. Thermostats,
H18-301 Humidistat, and H53-301 R.H. Transmitter.
• Field-adjustable “zero” adjustment.
Model Chart
Model No.a
T53-101
Wholesale
Description
Model No.a
2220-053b
Refer to Specifications.
a
Order cover separately (C2-4x recommended).
b
Includes wall plate, (1) 1/4” x 3/16” reducer, 6” piece of plastic tubing, and mounting plate.
Specifications
Action
Direct acting, proportional.
Temperature Range
50 to 90°F (10 to 32°C), fixed.
Construction
Components
Die cast aluminum, stainless steel, and glass-filled nylon.
Diaphragms
Fabric-reinforced neoprene.
Air filter
Internal.
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 ±0.5 psig (138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Connections
For spring-reinforced 3/16 in. plastic tubing and required fittings (order separately).
Calibration point
Refer to Figure 1.
Mounting
Upright position on wall.
Dimensions
2-1/32 H x 2-1/32 W x 1-3/8 D in. (52 x 52 x 35 mm).
129
T53-101 (2220-053)
Accessories
Model No.
6-371
10-53
10-57
10-58
10-62
10-63
10-64
10-66
10-73
10-76
10-77
10-78
10-80
10-82
10-82-SS
10-82-47
10-82-48
MCS-GA
N2-4
N5-49
N5-52
N5-53
N100-0010
N100-2501
N4-32
Wholesale Model No.
20-642
20-707
20-710

20-715
20-716

21-468
21-473
21-876
20-714






22-138
20-881
21-065
21-068
21-069
21-038
21-153
20-944
Description
Mounting ring (use with mounting heads).
Metal thermostat guard.
Mortar joint fitting, two tube, copper.
Mounting ring (use with N5-52).
Thermostat guard, clear Lexan (except T27 Series).
Insulating backplate, for plastic guards.
Tubing assembly with eyelets and fittings.
Mortar joint fitting, two “FR” tubes.
Drywall mounting fitting (snap-in).
Thermostat guard, opaque ABS (except T27 Series).
Adaptor plate.
Insulating backplate.
Concealed adjustment cover, for use with gray ABS cover.
Mounting plate for 2 x 4 switch box, black.
Stainless steel.
Beige.
Euro-white.
Gauge tap adaptor.
Calibration tool for thermostats, (and P341, P541 and P541-RA).
Adaptor (for use with N5-53).
Bracket, drywall mount (use with 10-58 mounting ring).
Bracket, stud mount rough-in.
0.017 scfm restrictor tee, red plastic (required).
In-line 0.017 scfm restrictor, red plastic.
Restrictor tee, copper tubing
Branch Pressure (psig)
Typical Applications
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
50
60
70
80
Ambient Temperature ( F)
Figure 1 Branch Pressure vs. Ambient Temperature.
Branch Air to
Control Device
M
M
N100-0010
B
M
S
R
C
P541
Receiver Controller
T53-101
Room Temperature
Transmitter
50 -90 F
(3-15 psig)
Figure 2 Typical Application.
130
90
T150 Series (2252 Series)
T150
Series
(2252
Series)
Duct, Immersion and Outdoor-Air Temperature Transmitters
The T150 Series pneumatic temperature
transmitters are designed to measure air or fluid
temperatures in pneumatic control systems and
transmit a fixed span, 3 to 15 psig signal to
controlling and indicating devices such as receiver
controllers, receiver gauges, sensitive pressure
switches, or snap-acting R503-1 diverting relays.
These transmitters are available with several types
of sensing elements.
These transmitters are “one-pipe” devices
requiring an externally restricted source of
constant pressure control air. Their design features
pneumatic feedback to assure accuracy and
stability over their temperature span.
Features:
• Permits remote readout and/or control of temperatures
associated with HVAC systems.
• Eight different ranges permit proper match of transmitter
range to applications.
• Quality design and construction, with beryllium copper
feedback bellows, provides excellent linearity, response
and stability.
• Field-accessible “zero” adjustment.
• Liquid-filled sensing elements in the following styles:
- 20 ft. (6.1 m) averaging, for air ducts.
- Rigid, for immersion (in well), or air duct insertion.
- 10 in. (25.4 cm) rigid coiled, for fast response in air ducts
where averaging is not required.
- Remote-bulb, for various applications.
Rigid Element
Remote Bulb
w/Capillary
10 inch
Coiled Element
20 Foot
Averaging Element
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
T150-1011
2252-510
T150-1012
T150-1013
2252-501
2252-502
T150-1021
2252-250
T150-1022
T150-1023
2252-251
2252-252
T150-1031
2252-610
T150-1035
2252-635
T150-1041
2252-110
Range
(non-adjustable)
°F (°C)
Span
°F
(°C)
40 to 140
(4 to 60)
100
(56)
0 to 100
(-18 to 38)
40 to 240
(4 to 115)
-40 to 160
(-40 to 71)
Mounting
Sensing Element Description
Duct or
immersion
Rigid element, 1/4 x 9-3/8 in. long (6 x 238 mm)
Duct
Averaging element, 20 ft. long (6 m)
Rigid (coiled) element, 10 in. long (25.4 cm)
Duct or
immersion
Rigid element, 1/4 x 9-3/8 in. long (6 x 238 mm)
Duct
Averaging element, 20 ft. long (6 m)
Rigid (coiled) element, 10 in. long (25.4 cm)
Duct or
200 immersion
(111)
Duct
200 Duct or
(111) immersion
Rigid element, 1/4 x 7-1/16 in. long (6 x 179 mm)
10-1/2 x 1/4 in. (267 x 6 mm) bulb with 9 ft. (2.7 m) capillary
Rigid element, 1/4 x 7-1/16 in. long (6 x 179 mm)
131
T150 Series (2252 Series)
Model Chart (Continued)
Span
°F
(°C)
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Range
(non-adjustable)
°F (°C)
T150-1046
2252-703
-40 to 160
(-40 to 71)
200 Duct or
(111) outdoor air
T150-1054
T150-1055
2252-151
2252-655
-25 to 125
(-32 to 52)
150
(84)
Duct or
outdoor air
T150-1062
2252-662
30 to 80
(-1 to 27)
50 to 100
(10 to 38)
50
(28)
Duct
50 to 150
(10 to 66)
100
(56)
Duct
T150-1073
2252-273
T150-1082
2252-701
T150-1083
2252-702
Mounting
Sensing Element Description
Replaces TKS-2031. 1/4 x 2.5 in. (6 x 64 mm) bulb with 42 in.
(1.1 m) capillary
4 x 1/4 in. (102 x 6 mm) bulb with 3 ft. (0.9 m) capillary
10-1/2 x 1/4 in. (267 x 6 mm) bulb with 9 ft. (2.7 m) capillary
Averaging element, 20 ft. long (6 m)
Rigid (coiled) element, 10 in. long (25.4 cm)
Replaces TKS-4017. Averaging element, 20 ft. long (6.1 m).
Replaces TKS-9017. Rigid (coiled) element, 10 in. long
(25.4 cm)
Specifications
Action
Direct, proportional.
Adjustments
None required, factory calibrated.
Supply air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig ±0.5 psi (138 kPa ±3.4 kPa) through 1.0 scfh restrictor.
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Output pressure
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa).
Air connection
1/8 in. -27 FNPT.
Maximum case ambient temperature 140°F (60°C).
Construction
Copper element, cast aluminum base, zinc plated steel cover.
Mounting
Duct or immersion (refer to Model Chart).
Weight
0.9 lb (0.4 kg).
Case dimensions
2-5/8 H x 3-1/16 W x 1-3/4 D in. (67 x 78 x 44 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
100-13
100-17a
100-25
100-47 a
100-49
100-71
N4-32
N100-0010
N100-2501
a
Wholesale Model No.
20-777
20-778
Description
Sun shield for sensing bulbs.
3/8 x 7-1/32 in. copper well with 1/2 in. NPT bushing.
20-782
20-803
3/8 x 10-17/32 in. copper well with 1/2 in. NPT bushing.
Neck extension adaptor - converts 7-1/32 in. well to 10-17/32 in. well.
20-805
22-401
20-944
21-038
21-153
3/8 x 7-1/32 in. Stainless steel well with 1/2 in. NPT bushing (includes 20-803).
Adapter, brass, for mounting T150 immersion transmitter in Barber-Colman AT-201 or AT-203 well.
Restrictor tee, copper tubing.
Restrictor tee, polyethylene tubing.
In-line restrictor.
Use together for copper well with extended neck.
Typical Applications
Branch Air to
Control Device
M
M
N100-0010
B
M
S
R
C
Receiver Controller
T150
Pneumatic
Temperature
Transmitter
3-15 psig
Figure 1 Typical Application.
132
T201-000
Series (2260
Series)
T201-000 Series (2260 Series)
Airstream Temperature Controllers
The T201 series are one-pipe, non-relay controllers designed
primarily for use as low limit thermostats in unit ventilator and central
fan system applications.
Features:
• Rigid or averaging liquid-filled sensing elements.
• Field-adjustable throttling range.
• Simple, straightforward one-pipe (nozzle and flapper) operation (Direct-Acting).
• May be used as primary or low-limit controller.
• Includes gauge-tee and compression restrictor-tee.
T201-023 Shown
Model Chart
Model No.
T201-023
T201-024
Wholesale Model
No.
Sensing Element Style Dimensions
2260-550
2260-551
Rigid stem 3/16 x 19-3/8 in. (5 x 492 mm)
Averaging 3/32 in. x 8 ft. (2 mm x 2.4 m)
Specifications
Thermostat
Sensing element
Control dial range
Throttling range
Output air signal
Control mechanism
Restriction
Construction
Action
Maximum bulb temperature limit
Supply air pressure
Nominal
Maximum
Air connections
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
Mounting
Case dimensions
Weight
Proportional type.
Liquid-filled.
40 to 150°F (4 to 65°C), marked Warmer-Cooler with 5°F (3°C) increments.
10 to 50°F (6 to 28°C), field adjustable, marked A through E.
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa).
Mounted in steel enclosure with cover.
External-fixed; furnished for unit ventilator applications.
White molded plastic snap-on cover, iridited aluminum base.
Direct only.
250°F (121°C).
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Ref. EN-123).
15 to 17 psig (103 to 117 kPa).
30 psig (207 kPa).
1/8 in. − 27 (FNPT).
30 scim (8.2 mL/s).
Insertion with two locknuts and washers on 3/8 in. NPSM threaded boss.
3-31/64 H x 1-1/8 W x 1-7/16 D in. (89 x 29 x 36 mm).
Approx. 0.6 lbs. (0.3 kg).
Accessories
Model No.
100-46
Wholesale Model No.
20-802
Description
Adjustable restrictor for fan system applications.
Typical Applications
Figure 1 Typical Application
(Heating-Only Unit Ventilator).
2
M
M B
M
Room or Return Air
Thermostat
1
T201
Low Limit Airstream
Temperature Controller
N.
C.
N.
O.
C
E/P Relay
Wire to
Load Side
of Unit Fan
Motor
1 Element in Discharge Air
V
M583 or M584
Damper Actuator
Outdoor/Return Air
Heating
Control Valve
N.O. 3-8 psig Spring
2 1/8" Resistor-tee and gauge-tee included. Gauge not included.
133
T460 Series (2298 Series)
T460
Series
(2298
Series)
Unit Temperature Controllers
The Unit Temperature Controllers are designed for
the proportional control of pneumatic devices and
actuators in environmental control systems. These
devices are designed primarily as return air
controllers in induction units, fan coil units, and
unit ventilators.
Features:
• Small size.
• Attractive appearance.
• Stable, linear response to room temperature changes.
• Sensor may be mounted up to 200 ft. (61 m) from
controller; connects to controller body with 1/4 in. outside
diameter (O.D.) polytube.
• Summer-winter models have snap-acting changeover from
direct action to reverse action and vice versa.
Model Chart
Model No.
Wholesale Model
No.
Action
T460-301
2298-060a
Reverse acting at 16 psig, direct acting at 25 psig
T461-301
2298-061a
Direct
T462-301
2298-062a
Reverse
T463-301
2298-063a
Direct acting at 16 psig, reverse acting at 25 psig
a
Comments
Includes metal cover and remote
bimetal sensor.
Includes mounting bracket.
Specifications
Setpoint range
65 to 85°F.
Throttling range
4°F fixed.
Sensitivity
2.5 psig/°F fixed.
Maximum ambient temperature
140°F (60°C).
Main air pressure
Clean, dry, oil free air required (Refer to EN-123).
Nominal
T460-301: 16 psig reverse acting, 25 psig direct acting.
T461-301, T462-301: 20 psig.
T463-301: 16 psig direct acting, 25 psig reverse acting.
Maximum
30 psig.
Connections
Fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Air consumption
T460-301, T463-301
29.4 scim (8.0 mL/s) at 16 psig, 45 scim (12.3 mL/s) at 25 psig.
T461-301, T462-301
29.4 scim (8.0 mL/s) at 16 psig.
Adjustments
External or concealed.
Calibration point
Factory calibrated at 9 psig for T461 and T462; 12 psig for T460 and T463.
Mounting
Using the mounting bracket, purchased separately, or wall mounting.
Dimensions
2-1/32 H x 2-1/32 W x 1-3/8 D in. (52 x 52 x 35 mm).
134
T460 Series (2298 Series)
Accessories
Model No.
10-72
100-50
100-51
220-07
C13-42
N2-4
Wholesale Model No.
21-800
20-821
20-822
20-818
20-856
20-881
Description
Setpoint adjustment cover.
Replacement sensor (RA) for T460 or T462 (2298-060 or 2298-062).
Replacement sensor (DA) for T461 of T463 (2298-061 or 2298-063).
Mounting bracket.
Replacement cover. No logo.
1/16 in. hexhead wrench.
Typical Applications
S
S/
16 psig Summer
25 psig Winter
S
Return Air Sensor
3
2
M B
W
T460-301
Thermostat
1
Valve
Return
Supply
V
AB
A
B
1 VB-9313 Series Valve Body.
2 R.A. 16 psig
D.A. 25 psig
3 Sensors of T460 Series Thermostats (Unit Temperature
Controllers) receive a supply of restricted air from an internal
restrictor located within the body of the controlller.
Unit
Heating/Cooling
Coil
Figure 1 Typical T460-301 Summer/Winter Application.
S
20 psig
M
Return Air Sensor
1
S
M B
T461-301
Thermostat
C.W.R.
V
AB
Valve
H.W.R.
A
B
H.W.S.
V
Valve
AB
A
B
C.W.S.
Unit
Cooling
Coil
1
Unit
Heating
Coil
Sensors of T460 Series Thermostats (Unit Temperature Controllers)
receive a supply of restricted air from an internal restrictor located
within the body of the controlller.
Figure 2 Typical T461-301 Heating/Cooling Application.
135
TK-1xxx Series, TKR-1xxx Series
TK-1xxx
Series,
TKR-1xxx
Series
Single Setpoint Room Thermostats
For proportional temperature control of pneumatic
valves and damper actuators to maintain room air
temperatures in heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning systems.
90
80
70
60
50
Features:
• Attractive appearance.
• Branch-line to sensing-element pneumatic feedback for
linear, stable operation.
• Available with °F or °C setpoint scales and thermometers.
• Covers supplied with exposed setpoint and thermometer.
• Cover inserts included for:
- Exposed setpoint only.
- Blank cover.
• Aspirated versions of certain models available.
TK-1xx1-600
Aspirated Thermostat
TK-1xx1
TKR-1xx1
Model Chart
Model No.
TK-1001
55 to 85°F
TK-1001-116
13 to 29°C
TK-1001-600
55 to 85°F
TK-1101
55 to 85°F
TK-1101-116
13 to 29°C
TK-1101-600
TK-1301
Control Actionb
Supply Pressure
Dial Markingsa
Direct Acting
13 to 29°C
TK-1381
55 to 85°F
TK-1601c
55 to 85°F
TK-1601-116 c
13 to 29°C
TK-1681 c
55 to 85°F
Two pipe
Aspirated
Reverse Acting
Two pipe
Aspirated
55 to 85°F
TK-1301-116
Type Thermostat
Direct Acting
15 psig day − 20 psig night
Two or three pipe with manual override
Reverse Acting
15 psig day − 20 psig night
Direct Acting
15 psig day − 20 psig night
Two or three pipe with manual override
Reverse Acting
15 psig day − 20 psig night
a
Dial stop pins included to limit dual range on all units.
b
Direct Acting (D.A.) increases output pressure on temperature rise. Reverse Acting (R.A.) decreases output pressure on temperature rise.
c
Has second white plastic tube to pass full line pressure (20 psi) at night and 0 psi at day. Used to actuate items such as pressure electric switches.
F TK-xxxx
C TK-xxxx-116
Insert
Insert
Figure 1 Standard Cover.
136
TK-1xxx Series, TKR-1xxx Series
Thermostat Replacement Kits.
Model No.
Control Actionb
Supply Pressure
Dial Markingsa
TKR-1001
55 to 85°F
TKR-1001-116
13 to 29°C
TKR-1101
55 to 85°F
TKR-1101-116
13 to 29°C
Direct Acting
15 or 20 psig
Reverse Acting
15 or 20 psig
TKR-1201
15 psig Reverse Acting −
20 psig Direct Acting
TKR-1281
15 psig Direct Acting −
20 psig Reverse Acting
TKR-1301
Direct Acting
15 psig day − 20 psig night
TKR-1381
Type Thermostat
Reverse Acting
15 psig day − 20 psig night
55 to 85°F
TKR-1601c
Direct Acting
15 psig day − 20 psig night
TKR-1681 c
Reverse Acting
15 psig day − 20 psig night
Direct Acting
15 or 20 psig
TKR-5001
Two pipe
Two or three pipe with manual override
One Pipe
a
Dial stop pins included to limit dual range on all units.
b
Direct Acting (D.A.) increases output pressure on temperature rise.
Reverse Acting (R.A.) decreases output pressure on temperature rise.
c
Has second white plastic tube to pass full line pressure (20 psi) at night and 0 psi at day. Used to actuate items such as pressure electric switches.
TKR-1xx1 Includes.
Quantity
Thermostat
1
Blank cover insert
1
Cover insert with setpoint cutout
1
a
Description
1
a
1/4 x 5/32 in. barbed fitting
1a
5/32 x 5/32 in. barbed fitting
1a
1/4 O.D. x 2 in. Tygon tubing
1a
1/4 x 1/4 in. compression to tubing fitting
1
5/64 in. Allen head cover screw
1
5/64 in. Allen head wrench
Two included in TKR-1xx1; three included in TKR-16xx.
Aspirated model with #6
spanner head screws
(requires AT-509)
Note: Not available on
TK-13xx, 16xx,
and TKR-xxxx models.
-600
Figure 2 Aspirated Thermostat Cover.
137
TK-1xxx Series, TKR-1xxx Series
F -399
-400
-403††
-404††
C -398
-410
-413††
-414††
†† 5/64 in. Allen screw used to secure cover.
Figure 3 Options (for quantities of 24 or more of each part number).
Add dash number (-xxx) suffix to base part number for desired option.
For metal covers, specify TK2-xxxx-xxx.
Specifications
Thermostat
Proportional type.
Sensing element
Bimetal.
Night setback
To 20°F (11°C) below day setpoint for Day/Night heating models.
Night setup
To 20°F (11°C) above day setpoint for Day/Night cooling models.
Control dial range
Refer to Model Chart.
Throttling Range
TK-1xx1, TKR-1xx1
Adjustable 2 to 10°F/10 psi, factory set at 4°F/10 psi.
Output air signal
0.5 psig to supply air pressure -0.5 psig.
Action
Refer to Model Chart.
Ambient limits
Shipping
Operating
Supply air pressure
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C). 0 to 98% RH, non-condensing.
40 to 150°F (4 to 65°C). 10 to 98% RH, non-condensing.
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
Refer to Model Chart.
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air connections
Main (black)
5/32 in. dia. spring reinforced plastic tube.
Branch (white)
5/32 in. dia. spring reinforced plastic tube.
Air consumption for sizing air compressor
TK/TKR-1001, 1001-116, 1101,
1101-116, 12x1, 13x1, TK-1301-116
13.8 scim (3.8 mL/s).
TK-1001-600, 1101-600, 16x1-116,
TK/TKR-16x1
41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
TK/TKR-1001, 1001-116, 1101,
1101-116, 13x1, 1301-116
16 scim (4.4 mL/s).
TK-1001-600, 1101-600
56 scim (15.3 mL/s).
TK/TKR-13x1, 12x1, TK-1301-116
80 scim (21.8 mL/s).
TK/TKR-16x1
104 scim (28.4 mL/s).
TK/TKR-16x1-116
144 scim (39.3 mL/s).
Cover
Beige plastic as standard except aspirated versions. Aspirated units have brushed stainless
steel covers.
Mounting
Upright position on wall.
138
TK-1xxx Series, TKR-1xxx Series
Specifications (Continued)
Dimensions
TK-1xx1, TK-1xx1-116, TKR-1xx1,
TKR-1xx1-116
TK-1xx1-600
4-3/8 H x 2-3/4 W x 1-5/8 D in. (111 x 70 x 43 mm).
Wall Box: 5 H x 3-1/2 W x 2-1/2 D in. (127 x 89 x 64 mm).
Cover: 5-1/2 H x 4 W in. (140 x 102 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
Description
For two pipe (non-aspirated) or bleed type thermostats (TK-1xxx)
AT-61 Series
Cover inserts.
AT-84 Series
Digital thermometer cover kit, plastic cover (TK-13xx, TK-16xx only).
AT-101
Lock cover kit.
AT-104a
Dial stop pins.
AT-504
Plaster hole cover (small).
AT-505
Surface mounting base.
AT-506
Pneumatic wall box fitting (two tubes for TK-100x and 110x).
AT-532-111-1-01
0.0075 tee restrictor for 5/32 in. plastic tubing.
AT-532-111-1-03
.010" Tee restrictor. 5/32" Tubing.
AT-532-222-1-02
0.0075 tee restrictor for 1/4 in. plastic tubing.
AT-533-101
Adaptor 1/4 in. plastic to 5/32 in. plastic.
AT-533-127
Adaptor 3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included) to 5/32 in. plastic.
AT-536
Pneumatic wall thermostat conversion kit.
AT-546
Auxiliary mounting base.
TOOL-015
Spanner head driver to #6 spanner head screws.
For two pipe aspirated type thermostats (TK-1xxx-600)
AT-509
Wall box required for aspirated thermostats.
AT-533-101
Adapter 1/4 in. plastic to 5/32 in. plastic.
AT-533-127
3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included) to 5/32 in. plastic.
AT-533-129
5/32" x 5/32" barbed brass connector.
For all models
TOOL-095-1
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
a
All thermostats are shipped with two dial stop pins.
Typical Applications
M
To Controlled
Device
M B
White Tube
Black Tube
TK-1001-xxx Series
TK-1101-xxx Series
TK-13X1-xxx Series
TKR-1XX1-xxx Series
M
B
White Tubes
M A
Black Tube
TK-16x1-xxx Series
To Controlled Device
To PE Switch
0 psig Day
20 psig Night
Figure 4 Two Pipe (Relay) Type.
139
TK-1071 Series, TK-1171
TK-1071
Series,
TK-1171
Submaster Room Thermostats
For proportional control of pneumatically-actuated
valves and damper actuators to maintain room air
temperature in heating, ventilating and air
conditioning systems.
90
80
70
60
50
Features:
• Attractive appearance.
• Branch-line to sensing-element pneumatic feedback for
linear, stable operation.
• Available with °F or °C setpoint scales and thermometers.
• Covers supplied with exposed setpoint and thermometer.
• Cover inserts included for:
- Exposed setpoint only.
- Blank cover.
• Aspirated versions of certain models available.
TK-1171
TK-1xxx
Model Chart
Model No.
Output Actiona
Submaster Reset Actionb
Direct
Direct
Reverse
Reverse
TK-1071
TK-1071-116 d
TK-1171d
a
Dialc Marking
55 to 85°F
13 to 29°C
55 to 85°F
Direct Acting (D.A.)  Increase output pressure on temperature rise.
Reverse Acting (R.A.)  Decrease output pressure on temperature rise.
b
Direct Reset  Increase in master pressure raises setpoint.
Reverse Reset  Increase in master pressure lowers setpoint.
c
Dial stop pins included to limit dial range.
d
Not available to Controline or Wholesale.
with
F TK-1x71
Insert
Insert
Figure 1 Standard Covers.
Specifications
Thermostat
Proportional type.
Sensing element
Bimetal.
Control dial range
Refer to Model Chart.
Setpoint
Remotely resettable by changing the reset pressure.
Throttling range
Adjustable 2 to 10°F/10 psi (-17 to -12°C/69 kPa), factory set at 4°F/10psi (-16°C/69 kPa).
Reset range
Adjustable 0.15°F/psi (-18°C/kPa) to 2°F/psi (-17°C/kPa) master pressure change, factory set at
0.5°F/psi (-18°C/kPa).
Output air signal
0.5 psig (3.4 kPa) to supply air pressure -0.5 psig (-3.4 kPa).
Output and reset action
Refer to Model Chart.
140
TK-1071 Series, TK-1171
Specifications (Continued)
Ambient limits
Shipping
Operating
Supply air pressure
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C). 0 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
40 to 150°F (4 to 65°C). 10 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Clean, oil free, dry air required (Ref. EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Minimum
15 psig (103 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Reset air pressure
Nominal
0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air connections
Main (black)
5/32 in. dia. spring reinforced plastic tube.
Reset and branch (white)
5/32 in. dia. spring reinforced plastic tube.
Air consumption for sizing air compressor
TK-1X71, TK-1071-116
13.8 scim (3.8 mL/s).
Aspirated modelsa
41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
TK-1X71, TK-1071-116
16 scim (4.4 mL/s).
Aspirated models a
64 scim (17.5 mL/s).
Cover
Beige plastic as standard except aspirated models. Aspirated models have brushed stainless steel
covers.
Mounting
Upright position on wall.
Dimensions
4-3/8 H x 2-3/4 W x 1-5/8 D in. (111 x 70 x 43 mm).
a
With the addition of AT-509 aspirating box.
Accessories
Model No.
AT-11-600
AT-61 Series
AT-101
AT-104
AT-504
AT-505
AT-506
AT-509
AT-536
AT-546
AT-533-101
AT-533-127
AT-533-129
TOOL-015
TOOL-095-1
Description
Aspirating kit.
Cover inserts.
Lock cover kit.
Dial stop pins. (NOTE: Pins included with each unit.)
Plaster hole cover (small).
Surface mounting base.
Pneumatic wall box fitting.
Wall box required for aspirated thermostats.
Pneumatic wall thermostat conversion kit.
Auxiliary mounting base.
Adapter 1/4 in. plastic to 5/32 in. plastic.
Adapter 3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included) to 5/32 in. plastic.
5/32" x 5/32" barbed brass connector.
Spanner head driver for #6 spanner head screws.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Typical Applications
From Master
(Resetting) Controller
or Transmitter.
M
Reset
M B
To Controlled
Device
TK-1071
TK-1171
Submaster Room
Thermostat
Figure 2 Typical Application.
141
TK-17xx Series
TK-17xx
Series
Dual Setpoint, Single Output Room Thermostats
For proportional control of pneumatic-actuated
valves and damper actuators to maintain room air
temperatures in heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning systems.
90
80
70
60
50
Da
y
Nig
ht
Features:
• Attractive appearance.
• Branch-line to sensing-element pneumatic feedback for
linear, stable operation.
• Available with °F or °C setpoint scales and thermometers.
• Covers supplied with exposed setpoint and thermometer.
• Cover inserts included for:
- Exposed setpoint only.
- Blank cover.
• Aspirated versions of certain models available.
TK-17xx-600
Aspirated Thermostat
TK-17xx
Model Chart
Model No.
°F
20 psig Supply Pressurea
15 psig Supply Pressure
°Cb
Dial Rangec
Control
Actiond
Cover
Legend
Dial
Control
Range c
Action d
TK-1717e
TK-1717-116
Direct
Direct
TK-1727 e
TK-1727-116
Reverse
Reverse
TK-1731 e
TK-1731-116
Reverse
TK-1741 e
TK-1741-116
TK-1711 e
TK-1711-116
TK-1751-116 g
TK-1751g
TK-1721 e
TK-1761 g
55 to 85°F
(13 to 29°C)
Heatf
Direct
Direct
55 to 85°F
(13 to 29°C)
Direct
Cool
Reverse
Direct
Day
TK-1721-116
Cover
Legend
Reverse
Night
Reverse
a
22 psi required if setpoints are more than 20°F apart.
b
Celsius models not available for wholesale.
c
Control dial is marked in °F on one side and °C on the other side. Units have built-in stops that can limit high and/or low setting of each dial.
d
Direct Acting (D.A.)  Increase output pressure on temperature rise.
Reverse Acting (R.A.)  Decrease output pressure on temperature rise.
e
These models available in aspirated versions, add -600 to model number.
f
Use AT-67 series cover plate to reverse heat/cool legends.
g
Units include a manual override lever for overriding 22 psig (152 kPa) operation and placing control into 15 psig (103 kPa) control mode when unit is
supplied with 22 psig (152 kPa). Lever automatically resets when supply pressure is reduced to 15 psig (103 kPa).
with
F
C -116
Insert
Insert
Figure 1 Standard Covers.
142
TK-17xx Series
Aspirated model with #6
spanner head screws
(requires AT-509)
Note: Not available on
TK-175x and TK-176x models.
Available on Invensys models only.
-600
Figure 2 Aspirated Thermostat Cover.
F -399*
C -398*
-400**
-410**
-403*
-413*
-400
-403
The only optional covers
available to Controline
and Uni-Line.
-404
-414
-408**
-409**
* Units have external thermometers.
** Units have internal setpoint adjustment:
setpoint can be seen externally.
Knob(s) are provided to modify the
unit to exterrnal adjustment.
Figure 3 Optional Covers. (For quantities of 24 or more of same part number).
Add “dash number” (-xxx) suffix to base part number for desired option. For metal covers, specify TK2-17xx-xx.
Specifications
Thermostat
Proportional two pipe type. Two pressure Heating/Cooling or Day/Night thermostats switch between
two bimetal sensors.
Sensing element
Two bimetals.
Control dial range
Two independent with stops. Refer to Model Chart.
Throttling range
Independently adjustable for each setpoint dial 2 to 10°F/10 psi change in branch line pressure,
factory set at 4°F/10 psi.
Output air signal
0.5 psig (3.4 kPa) to supply air -0.5 psig (-3.4 kPa).
Action
Refer to Model Chart.
Ambient limits
Shipping
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C). 0 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Operating
20 to 115°F (-7 to 46°C). 10 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Requires
15 and 22 psig (103 and 152 kPa) dual pressure. Refer to Model Chart.
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
143
TK-17xx Series
Specifications (Continued)
Air connections
Main (black)
5/32 in. dia. spring reinforced plastic tube.
Branch (white)
5/32 in. dia. spring reinforced plastic tube.
Air consumption for sizing air compressor
TK-17xx
13.8 scim (3.8 mL/s).
TK-17xx-600 (Aspirated
models)
41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
TK-17xx
80 scim (21.8 mL/s).
TK-17xx-600 (Aspirated
models)
120 scim (32.7 mL/s).
Cover
Beige plastic with brushed bronze metal inserts as standard except aspirated models. Aspirated
models have brushed stainless steel covers.
Mounting
Upright position on wall.
Dimensions
TK-17xx
4-3/8 H x 2-3/4 W x 1-5/8 D in. (111 x 70 x 43 mm).
TK-17xx-600 (Aspirated
models)
Wall box: 5 H x 3-1/2 W x 2-1/2 D in. (127 x 89 x 64 mm).
Cover: 5-1/2 H x 4 W in. (140 x 102 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AT-65 Series
AT-67
AT-504
AT-505
AT-506
AT-509
AT-536
AT-546
AT-533-101
AT-533-127
AT-533-129
TOOL-015
TOOL-080-1
TOOL-095-1
Description
Cover inserts.
Brushed bronze cover plates (cooling/heating).
Plaster hole cover.
Surface mounting base.
Pneumatic wall box fitting.
Wall box required for aspirated thermostats.
Pneumatic wall thermostat conversion kit.
Auxiliary mounting base.
Adapter 1/4 in. plastic to 5/32 in. plastic.
Adapter 3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included) to 5/32 in. plastic.
5/32" x 5/32" barbed brass connector.
Spanner head driver for #6 spanner head screws.
Calibration tool.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Typical Applications
M
M B
Black Tube
White Tube
TK-17xx Series
To Controlled
Device
Figure 4 Typical Application.
144
TK-18xx
Series,
TKR-18xx
Series
TK-18xx Series, TKR-18xx Series
Zero Energy Band Room Thermostats
For proportional control of pneumatically-operated
sequenced heating and cooling valves and/or
damper actuators to maintain room air temperature
with a zero energy band between heating and
cooling in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
systems.
90
80
70
60
HE
50
AT
IN
G
CO
OL
Features:
• Attractive appearance.
• Branch-line to sensing-element pneumatic feedback for
linear, stable operation.
• Covers supplied with exposed setpoints and thermometer.
• Cover inserts included for:
- Exposed setpoints only.
- Blank cover.
• Aspirated versions available.
IN
G
TK-18x1
TKR-18x1
TK-18x1-600
TKR-18x1-600
Model Chart
Control
Dial
Actionb
Rangec
TK-1801
Direct
TK-1801
Reverse
55 to 85°F
(13 to 29°C)
Model No.a
Thermostat Replacement Kits.
TKR-1801
Reverse
TKR-1811
Direct
a
Celsius models not available for wholesale.
b
Direct Acting (D.A.)  Increase output pressure on temperature rise.
Reverse Acting (R.A.)  Decrease output pressure on temperature rise.
c
Control dial marked °F on one side and °C on the other side; built-in dial stops can limit high and/or low setting of each dial.
55 to 85°F
(13 to 29°C)
TKR-18x1 Includes.
Quantity
Description
1
TK-18x1 thermostat
1
Blank cover insert
1
Cover insert with setpoint cutout
2
1/4 x 5/32 in. barbed fitting
2
5/32 x 5/32 in. barbed fitting
2
1/4 in. O.D. x 2 in. Tygon tubing
2
1/4 x 1/4 in. compression to tubing fitting
1
5/64 in. Allen head cover screw
1
5/64 in. Allen head wrench
145
TK-18xx Series, TKR-18xx Series
with
F
C -116
Insert
Insert
Figure 1 Standard Covers.
Aspirated model
(requires AT-509)
Note: Not available on
TKR-18x1 models.
Available to Invensys only.
-600
Figure 2 Aspirated Thermostat Cover.
-400
The only optional covers
available to Controline
and Uni-Line.
F -399*
C -398*
-400**
-410**
-403*
-413*
-404
-414
* Units have external thermometers.
** Units have internal setpoint adjustment;
setpoint can be seen externally.
Knob(s) are provided to modify the
unit to exterrnal adjustment.
Figure 3 Optional Covers. (For quantities of 24 or more of same part number).
Add “dash number” (-xxx) suffix to base part number for desired option. TKR-18x1 available with -116 options only.
For metal covers, specify TK2-18x1-xx.
Specifications
Thermostat
Proportional two pipe type. Thermostat maintains constant branch pressure when temperature is
between dial setpoints.
Sensing elements
Two bimetals.
Control dial range
Two independent with stops. Refer to Model Chart.
Throttling range
Adjustable 2 to 10°F/10 psi, change in branch pressure when temperature is not between dial
setpoints, factory set at 4°F/10 psi.
Output air signal
0.5 psig (3.4 kPa) to supply air pressure -0.5 psig (-3.4 kPa).
Zero energy band pressure
Adjustable 5 to 11 psig (34 to 76 kPa), factory set at 8 psig (55 kPa).
Action
Refer to Model Chart.
Ambient limits
Shipping
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C). 0 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Operating
20 to 115°F (-7 to 46°C). 10 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Minimum
15 psig (103 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air connections
Main (black)
5/32 in. dia. spring reinforced plastic tube.
Branch (white)
5/32 in. dia. spring reinforced plastic tube.
146
TK-18xx Series, TKR-18xx Series
Specifications (Continued)
Air consumption for sizing air compressor
TK-18x1, TKR-18x1
21 scim (5.7 mL/s).
TK-18x1-600 (Aspirated
models)
48.4 scim (13.2 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
TK-18x1, TKR-18x1
16 scim (4.4 mL/s).
TK-18x1-600
56 scim (15.3 mL/s).
Cover
Beige plastic with brushed bronze metal insert as standard except aspirated models. Aspirated
models have brushed stainless steel covers.
Mounting
Upright position on wall.
Dimensions
TK-18x1, TKR-18x1
4-3/8 H x 2-3/4 W x 1-5/8 D in. (111 x 70 x 43 mm).
TK-18x1-600
Wall box: 5 H x 3-1/2 W x 2-1/2 D in. (127 x 89 x 64 mm).
Cover: 5-1/2 H x 4 W in. (140 x 102 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AT-11-600
AT-65 Series
AT-504
AT-505
AT-506
AT-509
AT-536
AT-546
AT-533-101
AT-533-127
AT-533-129
TOOL-015
TOOL-080-1
TOOL-095-1
Description
Aspirating Kit.
Cover inserts.
Plaster hole cover.
Surface mounting base.
Pneumatic wall box fitting.
Wall box required for aspirated thermostats.
Pneumatic wall thermostat conversion kit.
Auxiliary mounting base.
Adapter 1/4 in. plastic to 5/32 in. plastic.
Adapter 3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included) to 5/32 in. plastic.
5/32" x 5/32" Barbed Brass Connector
Spanner head driver.
Changeover/dial.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Typical Applications
M
M B
Black Tube
White Tube
To Controlled
Device
TK-1801
TK-1811
Figure 4 Typical Application.
Branch Pressure
Supply
Pressure
Zero
Energy
Pressure
Heating
No Heating
or Cooling
Energy
Consumed
Direct
Acting
50
55
60
65
70
75
Cooling
Reverse
Acting
80
85
90
Figure 5 Typical Usage.
147
TK-2xxx Series, TK-3xxx Series, TK-4xxx Series, TK-4212-201
TK-2xxx
Series, TK3xxx Series,
TK-4xxx
Series, TK4212-201
Unitary Bulb Thermostats
For proportional temperature control of pneumatic
valves and actuators to maintain discharge
temperature of reheat systems and sampling
chamber or return air temperature of terminal units
and as a proportional low limit thermostat.
Features:
• Proportional, two-pipe nozzle and flapper design.
• One-pipe model available for use as low-limit controller.
• Adjustable throttling range.
• Straight, coiled or averaging liquid-filled sensing elements.
• Rugged design.
• Direct Acting or DA/RA models available.
Model Chart
Description
Model No.
and Actiona
psi (kPa)
Max. Safe
Bulb Temp.
°F (°C)
TK-3201
TK-2012
TK-4012
Coiled
1 x 5 (25 x 127)
Heating
D.A.b
TK-4001
TK-2201
140 (60)
Throttling
Range
Dial
Marked
“CoolerWarmer”
60 to 90
(15 to 32)
Adjustable
2 to 10°F (1 to 6°C)/
10 psi (69 kPa)
Factory Set
4°F (2°C)/
10 psi (69 kPa)
Coiled
1 x 5 (25 x 127)
Straight
3/16 x 11-1/4 (5 x 286)
Heating
D.A. b
TK-4212
TK-4212-201
Heating-Cooling
Low Limitc
20 (138) D.A.
Full Output
15 (103)
Averaging
1/8 x 48 (3 x 1.2 m)
Straight
7/32 x 14 (6 x 356)
Heating-Cooling
20 (138) D.A.
15 (103) R.A.
Heating-Cooling
20 (138) D.A.
15 (103) R.A.
Averaging
3/32 x 54 (2 x 1.4 m)
230 (110)
Averaging
3/32 x 54 (2 x 1.4 m)
Averaging
3/32 x 54 (2 x 1.4 m)
a
Direct Acting (D.A.)  Increase output pressure on temperature rise.
Reverse Acting (R.A.)  Decrease output pressure on temperature rise.
b
Field changeable to reverse acting.
c
At 20 psi (138 kPa) unit can bleed down a branch line from a controlling thermostat.
At 15 psi (103 kPa) unit is inoperative, i.e., passes controlling thermostat signal.
148
Control
Dial Range
°F (°C)
Straight
1/4 x 11-1/2 (6.35 x 287)
TK-2001
TK-3001
Bulb Style
Dimensions
in. (mm)
Supply Air
Pressure
psig (kPa)
15 (103)
Minimum
20 (138)
Nominal
15 (103) R.A. a
Cooling
20 (138) D.A. a
Heating
15 (103)
Minimum
20 (138)
Nominal
Dial
Marked
“CoolerWarmer”
30 to 90
(-1 to 32)
Adjustable
5 to 25°F (3 to 14°C)/
10 psi (69 kPa)
Factory Set
10°F (6°C)/
10 psi (69 kPa)
15 (103) R.A. a
Cooling
20 (138) D.A. a
Heating
15 (103)
Full Output
20 (138) D.A. a
Heating
TK-2xxx Series, TK-3xxx Series, TK-4xxx Series, TK-4212-201
Specifications
Thermostat
Proportional type using balanced lever system.
Sensing element
Liquid-filled copper with 3 ft. (914 mm) capillary.
Control dial range
Refer to Model Chart.
Throttling range
Refer to Model Chart.
Output air signal
1 psig (6.9 kPa) to supply air pressure -1.0 psig (-6.9 kPa).
Action
Refer to Model Chart.
Ambient limits
Shipping
-40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C). 0 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Case operating
40 to 140°F (4 to 60°C). 10 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Bulb
Refer to Model Chart.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
Refer to Model Chart.
Minimum
Refer to Model Chart.
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air connections
Post with barb for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing.
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
27.6 scim (8 mL/s) at 15 psig (103 kPa), 41.5 scim (11 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
40 scim (11.1 mL/s) at 15 psig (103 kPa), 56 scim (15.7 mL/s) at 20 psig (138 kPa).
Mounting
Directly by means of top mounting holes or with a right angle mounting bracket included with
thermostat.
Case dimensions
4-5/8 H x 2-1/8 W x 1-5/8 D in. (117 x 54 x 41 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AT-11-600
AT-208
TOOL-095-1
Description
Aspirating kit.
Duct mounting kit.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Typical Applications
M
M B
To Controlled
Device
TK-2xxx
TK-3xxx
TK-4xxx Except TK-4212-201
Unitary Bulb Thermostat
Figure 1 Typical Application.
149
TK-6xxx Series, TK-8xxx Series
TK-6xxx
Series,
TK-8xxx
Series
Relay Bulb Thermostats
For proportional temperature control of pneumatic
valves and actuators to maintain air or liquid
temperatures in duct, plenum chambers, liquid
lines, tanks, etc. May also be used as a low limit
thermostat.
Features:
• Two-pipe (Main and Branch) controllers.
• Direct or Reverse Action.
• Liquid-filled sensing elements: Remote-bulb with 6 ft.
(1.8 m) capillary, or 8 ft. (2.44 m) averaging element.
• Field-adjustable throttling range.
TK-6024 Shown
Model Chart
Bulb
Model No.
Action
Style
TK-6024
TK-8024
TK-6124
TK-8124
a
D.A.a
R.A. a
Dimensions
Straight
3/8 x 4-5/8 in. (9.5 x 117 mm).
Averaging
3/32 in.x 8 ft. (2.4 mm x 2.4 m).
Straight
3/8 x 4-5/8 in. (9.5 x 117 mm).
Averaging
3/32 in. x 8 ft. (2.4 mm x 2.4 m).
Direct Acting (D.A.)  Increase output pressure on temperature rise.
Reverse Acting (R.A.)  Decrease output pressure on temperature rise.
Specifications
Thermostat
Proportional two pipe type. Thermostats are ambient compensated.
Sensing element
Remote liquid-filled copper.
Control dial range
-20 to 240°F (-29 to 115°C). Shipped as -20 to 120°F, reverse side of dial 100 to 240°F.
Throttling range
Adjustable 3 to 35°F/10 psi (2 to 19°C/69 kPa) change in output, factory set at 5°F (3°C).
Output air signal
0.5 psig (3.4 kPa) to supply air pressure -0.5 psig (-3.4 kPa).
Action
Refer to Model Chart.
Ambient limits
Shipping
-40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C). 0 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Case operating
40 to 150°F (4 to 65°C). 10 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Bulb
310°F (154°C) maximum.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Minimum
15 psig (103 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air connections
1/8 in. FNPT for main, branches, and AL-362 gages (not included).
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
13.8 scim (3.8 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
16 scim (4.4 mL/s).
Mounting
Upright position on a wall or vertical flat surface.
Bulb dimensions
Refer to Model Chart.
Capillary length
6 ft. (1.8 m).
Case dimensions
5-13/16 H x 6-3/16 W x 4 D in. (148 x 157 x 102 mm).
150
TK-6xxx Series, TK-8xxx Series
Accessories
Model No.
AL-362
AT-201
AT-203
AT-206
AT-208
AT-209
AT-211
AT-539
TOOL-095-1
Description
Stem mounted back connected 0 to 30 psi gauge.
3/8 x 9-1/2 in. with 3/4 in. MNPT copper bulb well requires AT-209.
3/8 x 9-1/2 in. with 3/4 in. MNPT stainless steel bulb well requires AT-209.
3/8 x 4-1/2 in. with 1/2 in. MNPT copper bulb well.
Duct mounting kit.
Liquid line or tank mounting kit.
Bulb shield.
Pilot pressure kit.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit (required for use as low limit thermostat).
Typical Applications
To
To Controlled
Main Device
Main
Branch
Figure 1 Typical Application.
151
TK-9xxx Series
TK-9xxx
Series
Relay Bulb Thermostats
For proportional temperature control of pneumatic
valves and actuators to maintain air temperatures
in duct, plenum chambers, etc.
Features:
• Direct Acting with 18-1/4 in. (.46 m) rigid rod and tube
sensing element, or with 8 ft. (2.44 m) averaging element.
• Direct or Reverse Acting with 8 ft. averaging element.
• Non-bleed, force-balance design uses air only when
moving actuator.
• Field-adjustable throttling range.
TK-9838
TK-9637
TK-9737
Model Chart
Model No.
Actiona
TK-9637
D.A.
TK-9737
R.A.
TK-9838
D.A.
Element
Throttling Range
(Adjustable)
Maximum Temp. °F (°C)
Dimensions
30 to 180 (-1 to 82)
5 to 40°F/10 psi
(3 to 22°C/69 kPa)
225 (107)
250 (121)
7/16 in. (11 mm) diameter
18-1/4 in. (46 m) long
35 to 145 (1 to 63)
3 to 30°F/10 psi
(2 to 17°C/69 kPa)
Dial Range °F (°C)b
a
Direct Acting (D.A.)  Increase output pressure on temperature rise.
Reverse Acting (R.A.)  Decrease output pressure on temperature rise.
b
Dual marked.
210 (99)
Specifications
Sensing Element
TK-9637 and TK-9737
Rod and tube (bimetal).
TK-9838
Liquid filled averaging bulb.
Thermostat
Proportional relay type for mounting in ducts.
Control dial range
Refer to Model Chart.
Throttling range
Refer to Model Chart.
Output air signal
0.5 psig (3.4 kPa) to supply air pressure -0.5 psig (-3.4 kPa).
Action
Refer to Model Chart.
Ambient limits
Shipping
-40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C). 0 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Case operating
40 to 180°F (4 to 82°C). 10 to 98% R.H., non-condensing.
Element
Refer to Model Chart.
152
3/32 in. (2.4 m) diameter
8 ft. (2.4 m) long
TK-9xxx Series
Specifications (Continued)
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa).
Minimum
15 psig (103 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air connections
1/8 in. FNPT. Marked “S” for main, “R” for branch.
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
13.8 scim (3.8 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
16 scim (4.4 mL/s).
Mounting
On duct.
Element dimensions
Refer to Model Chart.
Case dimensions
4 H x 3-1/2 W x 3 D in. (102 x 89 x 76 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AT-208
TOOL-095-1
Description
Bulb mounting flange (2 required) TK-9838 only.
Pneumatic calibration tool kit.
Typical Applications
M
S R
To Controlled
Device
TK-9637
TK-9737
TK-9838
Relay Bulb Thermostat
Figure 1 Typical Application.
153
TKS-5001, TKS-5001-600, TKS-6001
TKS-5001,
TKS-5001600,
TKS-6001
Room and Light Troffer Temperature Transmitters
For proportional temperature control used with
RKS Series receiver-controllers. May be used with
one or more calibrated gauges for continuous
temperature indication at any local or remote
position.
Features:
• Force balance pneumatic feedback provides stable
operation.
• Highly sensitive bimetal sensing element.
• Three different models to suit various applications.
TKS-5001
TKS-5001-600
TKS-6001
Model Chart
Model No.
Mounting
TKS-6001
a
Span
°F (°C)
Sensing Element
Description
Aspirating
Cover
Ambient
Temperature
Limits
°F (°C)
Beige
Plastic
Walla
TKS-5001
TKS-5001-600
Range
(Non-Adj.)
°F (°C)
50 to 100
(10 to 38)
50 (28)
Bimetal
Light Troffer a
Brushed
chrome
Shipping:
-40 to 150
(-40 to 65)
Operating:
50 to 100
(10 to 38)
N.A.
Order fittings separately for type of wall construction.
Specifications
Ambient temperature
Refer to Model Chart.
Output air signal
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa).
Action
Direct.
Supply air pressure
Clean, oil free, dry air required (reference EN-123).
Nominal
20 psig (138 kPa) through 0.0075 in. (190 µm) restrictor.
Minimum
18 psig (124 kPa).
Maximum
30 psig (207 kPa).
Air consumption for sizing air
compressor
41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s). TKS-5001-600, 69.1 scim (18.9 mL/s).
Air capacity for sizing air mains
36 scim (13.2 mL/s). TKS-5001-600, 88 scim (24 mL/s).
154
Air
Connections
Dimensions
HxWxD
in. (mm)
5/32 in. dia.
spring
reinforced
plastic tube
4-3/8 x 2-3/4 x 1-5/8
(111 x 70 x 41)
Barbed
fittings for 1/4
in. plastic
tubes
5 x 3-1/2 x 2-1/2
(127 x 89 x 64)
Cover: 5-1/2 x 4 (140 x 102)
5/32 in. dia.
spring
reinforced
plastic tube
3/8 x 3/8 x 3
(10 x 10 x 76)
TKS-5001, TKS-5001-600, TKS-6001
Accessories
Model No.
AT-201
AT-203
AT-208
AT-211
AT-504
AT-505
AT-506
AT-509
AT-532-098-1-1
AT-532-098-1-2
AT-532-098-1-3
AT-532-111-1-01
AT-532-111-1-03
AT-532-222-2-01
AT-533-101
AT-533-127
AT-533-129
TOOL-015
Description
Copper bulb well.
Stainless steel bulb well.
Duct mounting kit for TKS-40xx.
Bulb shield for wall mounting TKS-2031.
Plaster hole cover (small).
Surface mounting base.
Pneumatic wall box fitting (two tubes) used for mtg. AT-532-11-1-01 under cover of TKS-5001.
Wall box required for TKS-5001-600.
0.0075 restrictor (white).
.005 in. restrictor (Red).
.010 in. restrictor (Blue).
0.0075 tee restrictor for 5/32 in. plastic tubing.
.010 in. Tee restrictor. 5/32 in. tubing.
.0075 in. Tee restrictor 1/4 in. tubing dual for TK-5000 Series.
Adaptor 1/4 in. plastic to 5/32 in. plastic.
Adaptor 3/16 in. copper or 1/4 in. copper with 1/4 in. solder coupling (not included) to 5/32 in. plastic.
5/32 in. x 5/32 in. barbed brass connector.
Spanner head driver for #6 spanner head screws.
Typical Applications
M 1
To Main
3
2
TKS-Transmitter
1 Required for TKS-5001-600 only (omit
external restrictor).
2 Transmitter located less than 200 Ft.
(61m) from restrictor.
3 Transmitter located less than 1000 Ft.
(305m) from Receiver Gauge.
Figure 1 Typical Application.
155
TS-29x Series
TS-29x
Series
Dial Thermometers
Dial thermometers for continuous visual indication
of temperature in ducts, pipes, and tanks.
50 75
90
50 75
30
11
0
Features
• Chromed brass construction with unbreakable acrylic lens.
• May be mounted in any position, and case may be angled
for optimum viewing.
• Two different ranges available to suit most HVAC
applications.
90
30
11
0
0
0
12
12
0
0
-40
-40
13
0
13
0
14
0
14
0
Direct Mounted
Remote Mounted
Model Chart
Model No.
TS-291
TS-292
TS-293
TS-294
a
Scale Rangea
°F (°C)
Type
Direct Mounting
Remote Mounting
-40 to 140 (-40 to 60)

30 to 240 (0 to 115)

-40 to 140 (-40 to 60)
30 to 240 (0 to 115)
Scales dual marked in °F and °C.
Specifications
Construction
Case
Chromed brass.
Lens
Crown type unbreakable acrylic.
Connection
Water tight 1/2 in. MNPT.
Mounting
In any position. Case can be rotated 150°.
Dimensions
Bulb
3-3/4 x 7/16 in. (95 x 11 mm), 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) extension.
Dial
3-1/2 in. (89 mm).
Accessories
Model No.
AT-219
156
Description
Bulb well.
Capillary Dimensions
6 ft. (1.8 m)
Accessories
Accessori
es
Application
6-371 (20-642)
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Mounting Ring
Description
Steel mounting ring for mounting thermostat to mounting head.
Includes two #6 flat head screws.
6-371
10-11 (20-693)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Tubing
Description
3/16 in. tygothane tubing assembly with spring. One tube with four
eyelets, but no fittings.
10-11
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
10-22
Mounting Box
Description
Plain deep mounting box 2-1/2 H x 1-7/8 W x 1-3/4 D in., 1/2 in.
conduit knockout, for use with 3 x 3 in. thermostats only, or with 2 x
2 in. thermostats and 10-77 (or 10-78) plate.
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
10-23 (20-699)
Gauge Adaptor
Description
Gauge tap adaptor, accepts any 1/8 in. MPT gauge or fitting and
inserts into thermostat body of T21, T22 T26, or T31, 3 x 3 in.
thermostats.
157
Accessories
10-47 (20-757)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Mounting Plate
Description
Aluminum mounting plate for adapting T-Series controls to
competitive mounting heads.
10-47
10-48 (20-758)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Wall Plate
Description
Lexan wall plate to cover 10-47. This plate will accept 2 x 2 in. or 3
x 3 in. devices.
10-48
10-50 (20-705)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Wall Plate
Description
Satin-chrome enamel wall plate to cover existing mounting head
when device is no longer required.
10-50
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Description
Gauge tap adaptor for T15 or T16 only. One end accepts 1/8 in.
MPT gage, other end screws into thermostat body.
158
10-51 (20-706)
Gauge Adaptor
Accessories
10-53 (20-707)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Thermostat Guard
Description
5-3/16 in. sq. cast metal guard. Will fit over 2 x 2 in. or 3 x 3 in.
units.
10-57 (20-710)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Mortar-joint Fitting
Description
Mortar-joint fitting with two 8 ft. (2.4 m) copper tubes for one or two
pipe 2 x 2 in. thermostats. Tygon with eyelets shipped inside
mounting head.
10-57
10-58 (20-711)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Mounting Ring
Description
Stamped metal mounting ring for use with 2 x 2 in. devices. Used
with N5-52 for drywall mounting.
10 58
10-59 (20-712)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Stop Kit
Description
Stop kit for mounting on base of 2 x 2 in. devices only.
10-59
159
Accessories
10-62 (20-715)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Thermostat Guard
Description
Molded Lexan guard for 2 x 2 in. devices. Clear front, satin-chrome
enamel base.
10-63 (20-716)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Back Plate
Description
Square insulating back plate for all 2 x 2 in. devices. Has four
starter holes, 1/16 in. deep on back surface. 10-62 and 10-76
guards can be mounted on 10-63.
10-63
10-64
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Tubing
Description
3/16 in. tygothane tubing assembly, with spring, two eyelets, and
two barbed fittings for 1/4 in. plastic tubing.
10-64
10-66 (21-468)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Mortar-joint Fitting
Description
Mortar-joint fitting with two 5/32 in. “FR” type tubes (8 ft. long)
encased in an “FR” sheath for one or two pipe 2 x 2 in. thermostats.
Tygon with eyelets shipped inside mounting head.
10-66
160
Accessories
10-72 (21-800)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Adjustment Cover
Description
Concealed adjustment cover for use with metal 2 x 2 in. covers.
(black)
10-72
10-73 (21-473)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Snap-in Fitting
Description
Snap-in “labor-saving” fitting for mounting 2 x 2 in. thermostats,
humidistats, and transmitters on drywalls having at least 3-1/2 in.
studs.
10 73
10-76 (21-876)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Thermostat Guard
Description
Molded ABS guard for 2 x 2 in. devices. Color: opaque gray.
10-76
10-77 (20-714)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Adaptor Plates
Description
10-77: Adaptor plate (molded, black) used to mount 2 x 2 in.
devices on 3 x 3 in. hardware. Covers larger hardware so it is not
visible.
10-77
161
Accessories
10-78
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Back Plate
Description
Insulating back plate for all 2 x 2 in. devices. Has four starter holes,
1/16 in. deep on back surface. Guards cannot be mounted on
10-78.
10-78
Application
10-80 (21-964), 10-81
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Description
10-80: Concealed adjustment cover for use with gray ABS cover.
(gray)
10-81: Concealed adjustment cover for use with beige ABS cover.
(beige)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Adjustment Cover
10-80
10-81
10-82 (20-850), 10-82-SS, 10-82-47,
10-82-48
Mounting Plates
Description
10-82: Thermostat mounting plate provides 2 x 2 in. device
mounting to a 2 x 4 in. vertical or horizontal outlet box. Includes two
wing bolt screws. Color: black.
10-82-SS: Thermostat mounting plate provides 2 x 2 in. device
mounting to a 2 x 4 in. vertical or horizontal outlet box. Includes two
wing bolt screws. Color: stainless steel.
10-82-47: Thermostat mounting plate provides 2 x 2 in. device
mounting to a 2 x 4 in. vertical or horizontal outlet box. Includes two
wing bolt screws. Color: beige.
10-82-48: Thermostat mounting plate provides 2 x 2 in. device
mounting to a 2 x 4 in. vertical or horizontal outlet box. Includes two
wing bolt screws. Color: Euro-white.
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Description
Adaptor plate (beige) used to mount 2 x 2 in. devices on 3 x 3 in.
hardware. Covers larger hardware so it is not visible.
162
10-82
20-720
Adaptor Plate
Accessories
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
20-042
Mounting Plate
Description
Thermostat mounting plate for use with 10-77 (20-714) adaptor
plate, where a wider plate than 10-58 (20-711) is needed. Replaces
the 20-711 where a wider mounting plate is needed. Dimensions 3
x 1-7/8 in.
Application
Brass sunshield, cad plated, for T150 element.
Application
Optional. T150 transmitter accessory.
100-13 (20-777)
Sunshield
100-17 (20-778)
Copper Well
Specifications
• 3/8 x 7-1/32 in. copper well with 1/2 in. NPT bushing.
Application
Standard. T150 transmitter accessory.
100-25(20-782)
Copper Well
Specifications
• 3/8 x 10-17/32 in. copper well with 1/2 in. NPT bushing.
163
Accessories
100-47 (20-803)
Application
Adapts existing female threaded wells
(7/16 in.  24) for T150 set screw mounting. T150 transmitter
accessory.
Adaptor
Neck extension adaptor-converts 7-1/32 in. well to 10-17/32 in.
well.
100-49 (20-805)
Application
T150 transmitter accessory.
Stainless Steel Well
Specifications
• 3/8 x 7-1/32 in. stainless steel well with 1/2 in. NPT bushing.
Includes 100-47 (20-803).
Transmitter
Part Number
Standard
Copper Well
Standard
Stainless Steel Well
Extended Neck
Copper Well
Extended Neck
Stainless Steel Well
100-25
100-49
100-17 + 100-47
100-49
T150-1011
T150-1021
T150-1031
T150-1041
Application
Adaptor, brass, for mounting T150 Immersion Transmitter in
Barber-Colman AT-201 or AT-203 well.
164
100-71 (22-401)
Adaptor
Accessories
Application
Pneumatic thermostat calibration kit for 2 x 2 Thermostats.
900-002
Calibration Kit
Application
AKS-4
Cover for RKS-1001 through 4002 and RKSR-4000.
Cover
Application
AKS-5
Cover for RKS-5001. Used when mounting receiver-controller
remote, from cabinet or locations where it is susceptible to
damage.
Cover
165
Accessories
Application
Ball joint linkage connector used for linking nonparallel
shafts.
AM-132
Ball Joint Linkage Connector
Specifications
• Cadmium plated connector with 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) diameter hole.
Application
Damper actuator linkage.
AM-530
Crank Arm
Specifications
• Construction: Hole for 1/2 in. (13 mm) dia. shaft, holes for
3-1/2 in. (89 mm) and 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) stroke.
• For use with actuators:
- MK-31xx.
- MK-71xx.
Application
Damper actuator linkage.
AM-532
Frame Mounting Kit
Specifications
• Construction: Bolt-on frame lug and blade clip.
• For use with actuators:
- MK-71xx.
- Pivot mounted MK-38xx.
Application
Damper actuator linkage.
Specifications
• Construction: Shaft and lock nut 4-3/4 L x 5/8 in. (121 x 16 mm).
• AM-533 for use with actuators:
- MK-3xxx.
- MK-71xx-0-0-1 (discontinued).
• AM-543 for use with actuator MK-71x1-0-0-2.
166
AM-533, AM-543
Actuator Shaft Extension
Accessories
Application
Damper actuator linkage.
AM-534
Pivot Stud
Specifications
• Construction: Stud with bolts and washers.
• For use with actuators:
- MK-3xxx.
- MK-71xx.
Application
Damper actuator linkage.
Specifications
AM-535, AM-541
Clevis
• Provided as standard with MK-71xx and MK-38xx; must be
ordered to obtain pivot mounting of MK-31xx.
AM-535
• Construction: 24 UNC threaded hole for actuator shaft.
• For use with actuators:
- MK-33xx.
- MK-38xx.
- MK-71xx-0-0-1 (discontinued).
AM-541
• Construction: 14 UNC threaded hole for actuator shaft.
• For use with actuators:
- MK-71xx-0-0-2 (Current).
- MK-7821-0-0-1.
- MK-7921-0-0-1.
Application
Damper actuator linkage.
Specifications
AM-536
Mounting Plates
• Provided as standard with MK-71xx and MK-38xx; must be
ordered to obtain pivot mounting of MK-31xx.
• For use with actuators:
- MK-7000.
- Pivot mounted MK-3000.
167
Accessories
AM-538
Application
Damper actuator linkage.
Brace Kit
Specifications
• Construction: Threaded rod and connectors.
• For use with actuators:
- MK-71xx.
AM-542, AM-545
Application
Damper actuator linkage.
Rod End Connector
Specifications
• Construction: Hole for 5/16 in. (10 mm) dia. rods.
• AM-542 for use with actuator MK-71x1-0-0-2.
• AM-545 for use with actuator MK-3xxx.
AP-302, AP-305
Application
Duct static pressure sensing tips.
Pressure Sensing Tips
Specifications
• Mounting hardware: Provided.
Type of
End Fitting
Model No.
Construction
Mounting Location
AP-302
1/4 in. for plastic
or copper
Brass
Areas with air turbulence
caused by filters, dampers, etc.
AP-305
1/8 in. pipe thread
Brass with S.S.
Very low actuating pressure
tee end
Application
Lock cover screw kit modifies TK Series room thermostats to
prevent unauthorized tampering of either the dial setting or the
internal mechanism.
Specifications
• Two kits are required for duplex type thermostats.
• Used on all TK-1xxx and TK-5xxx except TK-17xx, TK-18xx.
168
Dimensions in. (mm)
For Use with
Insertion length 4 (102); P323 Series, PC-301,
5 L x 2-1/2 W (127 x 64) PF-300 Series, PP-1012,
PP-3013, PP-3113, PP-8121,
PP-8516, PP-8616,
8-3/4 L x 2-1/2 W
PP-8621, PKS-323, R435,
(222 x 64)
R436
AT-101
Lock Cover Screw Kit
Accessories
AT-104
Application
Package of 100 dial stop pins to insert in dial ends to limit the
high or low setting of room thermostats.
Dial Stop Pins
Specifications
• Used on all TK-1xxx and TK-5xxx except TK-17xx, TK-18xx.
AT-201, AT-203, AT-206
Application
Immersion well for use with 3/8 in. (10 mm) temperature bulbs.
Immersion Well
Specifications
• Ambient temperature limits: -40 to 350°F (-40 to 177°C).
Application Limitations at
250°F (121°C) Fluid Temp.
Dimensions
Model No.
Material
O.D.
in.
(mm)
Insertion
Length
in. (mm)
Overall Well
Length
in. (mm)
Fitting
in.
Max. Recom.
Velocity FPS
(m/s)
Max. Recom.
Static
Pressure
psig (kPa)
AT-201a
Copper
1/2
(13)b
9-1/2
(241)
10-1/4
(260)
3/4
MNPT
11
(3.3)
250
(1728)
AT-203a
Stainless
Steel
1/2
(13)b
9-1/2
(241)
10-1/2
(267)
3/4
MNPT
20
(6.1)
500
(3448)
AT-206
Copper
1/2
(13)b
4-1/2
(114)
5-13/16
(148)
1/2
MNPT
11
(3.3)
250
(1728)
a
Requires AT-209 for TK-6024, TK-6124.
b
For 3/8 in. (10 mm) diameter bulbs.
Application
Duct mounting kit for pneumatic temperature bulbs.
Used With
TK-6024, TK-6124
AT-208
Duct Mounting Kit
169
Accessories
Application
3/4 in. MNPT liquid line or tank mounting kit for TK-6024 or
TK-6124 Series bulb thermostats. Bulb well is recommended.
Application
Bulb well for TS-29x Series dial thermometers in immersion
applications where removal of sensing element without
draining the system is necessary.
AT-209
Liquid Line or Tank Mounting Kit
AT-219
Bulb Well
Specifications
• Construction: Brass.
• Connection: 1/2 in. MNPT.
• Dimensions: 9/16 Dia. x 6-1/2 L in. (14 x 159 mm).
Application
Single room type electric or pneumatic thermostats, sensing
elements and electronic controllers or sensing elements. Used
to cover a rough plaster hole in the wall. Use with AT-505
sub-base for surface mounting applications.
AT-504
Mounting Base Single
Specifications
• Color: Beige
• Dimensions: 5-7/16 H x 3-7/8 W x 3/8 D in. (138 x 98 x 16 mm).
Application
Surface mounting of single room type electric or pneumatic
thermostats, sensing elements and electronic controllers or
sensing elements. Can be used over AT-504 to facilitate
installations where there is no wall box.
Specifications
• For surface mounting, screws field supplied.
• Color: Beige.
• Dimensions: 4-5/8 H x 3-1/8 W x 1 D in. (117 x 79 x 25 mm).
170
AT-505
Mounting Base Single
Accessories
AT-546
Application
Two single wall type thermostats, controllers or sensing
elements for dual function control. Can be installed on a
horizontally mounted switch box by mounting an AT-504 on
the AT-546.
Mounting Base Dual
Specifications
• Color: Beige painted.
• Dimensions: 6-1/4 H x 6-1/4 W x 1/4 D in. (159 x 159 x 6 mm).
Application
Room thermostat guards protect thermostats from damage
and vandalism.
AT-1103, AT-1163
Thermostat Guard
Specifications
• Construction: Wire guard with steel base plate.
• Mounting: To standard outlet or directly to the wall.
• Guard/Thermostat combinations:
- HKS-5033.
- TK-1xxx.
- TK-5xxx.
- TKR-1xxx.
- TKR-5xxx.
- TKS-5001.
- AT-1163 will accept two single thermostats on an AT-546
auxiliary mounting base.
H
W
D
Side View
End View
• Dimensions:
- AT-1103: 4-1/4 H x 2-5/8 W x 1-5/8 D in. (108 x 67 x 41 mm).
- AT-1163: 6-1/2 H x 6-5/8 W x 3-1/4 D in. (165 x 168 x 83 mm).
AT-1104
Application
Room thermostat guards protect thermostats from damage
and vandalism.
Thermostat Guard
Specifications
• Construction: Cast aluminum guard with steel base plate.
• Mounting: To standard outlet or directly to the wall.
• Guard/Thermostat combinations:
- HKS-5033.
- TK-1xxx.
- TK-5xxx.
- TKR-1xxx.
- TKR-5xxx.
- TKS-5001.
H
D
Side View
W
End View
• Dimensions: 4-1/4 H x 3-1/8 W x 1-5/8 D in. (108 x 70 x 41 mm).
171
Accessories
AT-1105
Application
Room thermostat guard protects thermostats from damage
and vandalism.
Thermostat Guard
Specifications
• Construction: Clear plastic guard with solid base and tumbler
type key lock.
H
W
• Mounting: To standard outlet or directly to the wall.
• Guard/Thermostat combinations:
- HKS-5033.
- TK-1xxx.
- TK-5xxx.
- TKR-1xxx.
- TKR-5xxx.
- TKS-5001.
- Any 2 x 2 wall mounted device.
D
Side View
End View
• Dimensions: 3-7/8 H x 3-1/2 W x 2-1/2 D in. (98 x 89 x 63 mm).
AT-1155
Application
Room thermostat guard protects thermostats from damage
and vandalism.
Thermostat Guard
Specifications
• Construction: Clear plastic guard with solid and ring base,
tumbler type key lock.
H
W
• Mounting: To standard outlet or directly to the wall.
• Included: Mounting ring for installation over installed thermostats
without their removal from the wall.
• Guard/Thermostat combinations:
- HKS-5033.
- TK-1xxx.
- TK-5xxx.
- TKR-1xxx.
- TKR-5xxx.
- TKS-5001.
- Any 2 x 2 wall mounted device.
• Dimensions: 5-1/4 H x 4-5/8 W x 3 D in. (133 x 117 x 76 mm).
172
D
Side View
End View
Accessories
AT-1165
Application
Room thermostat guard protects thermostats from damage
and vandalism.
Thermostat Guard
Specifications
• Construction: Clear plastic guard with solid and ring base,
tumbler type key lock.
H
W
• Mounting: To standard outlet or directly to the wall.
• Included: Mounting ring for installation over installed thermostats
without their removal from the wall.
• Guard/Thermostat combinations:
- HKS-5033.
- TK-1xxx.
- TK-5xxx.
- TKR-1xxx.
- TKR-5xxx.
- TKS-5001.
- Any 2 x 2 wall mounted device.
D
Side View
End View
• Dimensions: 8 H x 5-1/2 W x 3-1/2 D in. (203 x 140 x 89 mm).
173
Accessories
Accessor
ies
MCS-GA (22-138)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Gauge Adaptor
Description
Gauge adaptor for 2 x 2 thermostats, H18, H53, T53 and
PNEUMODULAR® MCS-CT and MCS-CV.
N1-51, N1-52, N1-53
(21-238, 21-239)
Application
Used with variable air controllers. Available in three sizes.
Description
N1-51 — 3 inches.
N1-52 — 6 inches.
N1-53 — 9 inches.
Differential Pressure Pick-ups
N1-51
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Calibration Tool.
Description
N1-52
N1-53
N2-4 (20-881)
Calibration and Cover-screw Wrench
1/16 in. and 1/4 in. hex head thermostat calibration and coverscrew wrench. (Also adjusts P541 Series Receiver-Controllers and
older (3 x 3 in.) Robertshaw thermostats.)
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
Description
1.0 scfh restrictor (1/4 in. O.D. compression) for use on 1/4 in. O.D.
copper tubing or can be used on polythylene with insert.
174
N4-32 (20-944)
Restrictor
Accessories
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
N5-49 (21-065)
Installation Adaptor
Description
3 in. installation adaptor. Use with N5-53 for dry wall or plaster.
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
N5-52 (21-068)
Mounting Bracket
Description
Mounting bracket (for use in mounting thermostats). For installation
on dry wall construction. Used with 10-58 for drywall mounting.
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Fittings, Accessories, Adaptors
and Tools.
N5-53 (21-069)
Mounting Plate
Description
Mounting plate for thermostats. Use for dry wall construction. (To
be roughed in prior to installation of dry wall.)
175
Accessories
N5-95 (22-022)
Thermostat Conversion Kit
This thermostat conversion kit was designed and
packaged with the serviceman in mind. It allows a
quick and easy replacement of competitive devices
with a new T1x, T2x, or T3x (2 x 2 in.) pneumatic
thermostat.
Features:
• Direct replacement of most old or obsolete thermostats.
• Allows replacement without have to remove the old pipe
head.
• Wallplate skirt covers marks made by old thermostat.
Mounting Bracket
Powers
Adaptor
Gasket
Wall Plate Skirt
O-rings
Mounting
Screws
#8 x 1"
Wall Plate
Thermostat
Mounting
Screws
#6 x 1"
Plastic Tubing
Tubing Adaptor
3/16"x 1/4"
Model Chart
Kit Contains
Model No.
Wholesale Model No.
Quantity
N5-95
176
22-022
Powers
Adaptor
Description
1
Wall plate
1
Wall plate skirt
1
Mounting bracket
2
Tubing adaptor 3/16 x 3/16 in.
2
Tubing adaptor 3/16 x 1/4 in.
2
3/16 in. tubing x 1/4 in. threaded adaptor
2
O-ring
1
Powers adaptor gasket
1
Powers adaptor
2
Mounting screw no. 8 x 1 in.
2
Wall plate mounting screws no. 6 x 1/2 in.
2
Thermostat mounting screws no. 6 x 1 in.
2
Tubing clamps
1
1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing
Wall Plate
Mounting
Screws
#6 x 1/2"
Tubing Adaptor
3/16"x 1/4"
Tubing
Clamps
Accessories
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Restrictor, Restrictor Tees, and
Thermostat Calibration Kit.
N100-0005 (21-039)
Restrictor Tee
Description
0.5 scfh restrictor tee. Color: light green. Note: This restrictor
should be used only (a) when the 100-50 (RA) or 100-51 (DA)
temperature sensors are used separately, or (b) for special
applications requiring low air flow.
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Restrictor, Restrictor Tees, and
Thermostat Calibration Kit.
N100-0010 (21-038)
Restrictor Tee
Description
1.0 scfh restrictor tee for use with one-pipe thermostats or
transmitters (1/4 in. polythylene or polyurethane tubing). Color: red.
Application
2 X 2 Thermostat Installation Restrictor, Restrictor Tees, and
Thermostat Calibration Kit.
N100-2501 (21-153)
In-line Restrictor
Description
1.0 scfh in-line restrictor.
177
Accessories
Accessorie
N800 Series
Damper Actuator Accessories for
M556, M572, M574, M583, M584
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
N800-0801

Ball-joint
N800-1301

Hex coupling 1/4-20
N800-0803

Ball-joint/swivel 1/4-20 male x 5/16 in.
dia. female. (Receives 5/16 in. push
rod.)
N800-0804
21-807
N800-0901

N800-0902

N800-0903


N800-0904

Mounting post
M574 & M583
actuators

N800-0905

Offset mounting bracket
M573 actuator

—
Illustration
178
Description
For Use With:
—
1/4 in. -20 pushrods

Ball-joint/swivel 5/16 in. dia. cross hole x Crank arms and 5/16
5/16-24 top screw x 1/4-20 male with nut in. pushrod.
and lockwasher
M573 actuator
Right angle bracket
M574 actuator
M572 actuator

N800-1007

Stamped clevis for 1/4 in. clevis pin
(Mounts with N800-1809 bolt)

N800-1100

Clevis pin

N800-1102

Clevis pin

N800-1105

Nylon bushing
M693 actuator

N800-1151

5/16 in. I.D.shaft collar
M572 actuator

N800-1153

7/16 in. I.D.shaft collar
M573, M574, M583 &
M584 actuators
N800-1205

Hair-pin (cotter)
Clevis pins
—
Accessories
N800 Series
Damper Actuator Accessories for
M556, M572, M574, M583, M584
Illustration
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.

N800-1206

Lock pin

N800-1403

Slotted crank arm - 3/8 in. shaft

N800-1404

Slotted crank arm - 1/2 in. shaft

N800-1414

Crank arm for 3/8 in. O.D. extended
shaft
Description
For Use With:
M556, M572, M573,
M574 actuators



Crank arm for 1/2 in. O.D. extended
shaft
N800-1415
21-806
N800-1501

Feedback arm used with the N800-0555- M573, M574 and
Box
M556 actuators.
N800-1601

2 in. push rod - 1/4-20 male x 1/4-20
female

N800-1602

1 in. push rod - 1/4-20 fully threaded
stud

N800-1604

Push rod - 1/4 dia. x 4-1/2 in. L

N800-1607

Push rod - 1/4 dia. x 7-1/2 in. L

N800-1614

Push rod -14 in. L

N800-1615

Push rod - 1/4 dia. x 15 in. L

N800-1629

Push rod - 1/4 dia. x 31-1/2 in. L

M693-3095
693-8095
M695-5095 actuator
Used with
N800-1414 or
N800-1415
N800-1612

Eye rod - 6 in. L
N800-1621

Push rod - 1/4 dia. x 13 in. L

N800-1629

Push rod - 31-1/2 in. L

179
Accessories
N800 Series
Damper Actuator Accessories for
M556, M572, M574, M583, M584
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
N800-1630
21-810
N800-1635

Push rod - 1/4 dia. x 10 in. L; bent 18°
N800-1651

Pre-assembled linkage for use with 1/2
in. O.D. extended damper shafts. 90°
rotation. Maximum torque is 23 in.-lbs.
M693 actuator only.
N800-1805

1/2 in. L 10-32 self-tapping mounting
screw
M572 actuator
N800-1809

1/2 in. L 1/4-20 mounting machine screw
M573 and M574
actuators

N800-1882

Actuator stroke limiting screw 3 in. L


N800-1884

Actuator stroke limiting screw 3-1/2 in. L


Illustration

180
Description
Push rod - 5/16 dia. x 6-1/4 in. L
For Use With:
M572 actuator


N800-1920

Hex nut, 1/2 in. -13, UNC-2B (Use (2)
with N800-0904 mtg. post)

N800-2101

1/2 in ID lockwasher (Use (2) with N8000904 mtg. post)


N800-2102

1/4 in ID flat plated steel washer (Use (2)
with N800-0904 mtg. post)


N800-2160

1/2 in. ID flat plated steel washer (Use
(2) with N800-0904 mtg. post)


N800-2200

Retaining ring (Use (2) with N800-0904
mtg. post)


N800-2257

Positive positioner feedback spring 5 psi
for 3 in. actuator
M573 actuator

N800-2258

Positive positioner feedback spring 5 psi
for 4 in. actuator
M574 actuator

N800-2259

Positive positioner feedback spring 5 psi
for 6 in. actuator
M556 actuator

N800-2267

Positive positioner feedback spring 10
psi for 3 in. actuator
M573 actuator

N800-2268

Positive positioner feedback spring 10
psi for 4 in. actuator
M574 actuator

N800-2269

Positive positioner feedback spring 10
psi for 6 in. actuator
M556 actuator

N800-2277

Positive positioner feedback spring 3 psi
for 3 in. actuator
M573 actuator

N800-2278

Positive positioner feedback spring 3 psi
for 4 in. actuator
M574 actuator

N800-2279

Positive positioner feedback spring 3 psi
for 6 in. actuator
M556 actuator

N800-4202

3-12 psi spring
M572 actuator
Accessories
N800 Series
Damper Actuator Accessories for
M556, M572, M574, M583, M584
Illustration
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.

N800-4203

5-10 psi spring
M572 actuator

N800-4205

8-13 psi spring
M572 actuator

N800-4206

10-15 psi spring
M572 actuator

N800-4208

4-8 psi spring
M572 actuator

N800-4302

3-12 psi spring
M573 actuator

N800-4303

5-10 psi spring
M573 actuator

N800-4305

8-13 psi spring
M573 actuator

N800-4306

10-15 psi spring
M573 actuator

N800-4308

4-8 psi spring
M573 actuator

N800-4402

3-12 psi spring
M574 actuator

N800-4405

8-13 psi spring
M574 actuator

N800-4408

4-8 psi spring
M574 actuator

N800-9422

Diaphragm
M572 actuators

N800-9423

Diaphragm
M573 actuators

N800-9424

Diaphragm
M574 actuators

N800-9426

Diaphragm
M556 actuators


2850-058
Description
Mounting hardware (kit) for all 3 in. and 4
in. post-mounted actuators.
For Use With:
—
181
PNEUMODULAR Accessories
PNEUMODULAR Accessories
Illustration
182
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
K502
22-150
Mounting bracket for all PNEUMODULAR relays except R503 and
R504 series PNEUMODULAR diverting relays.
K503
22-151
Mounting bracket for R503 and R504 series PNEUMODULAR
diverting relays.
K504
22-152
Mounting bracket for P541 series PNEUMODULAR receiver
controllers and up to three gauges (using gauge mounting fittings or
gauge mounting tees).
K511
22-155
Mounting bracket for one PNEUMODULAR gradual or selector switch.
K512
22-156
Mounting bracket for one PNEUMODULAR gradual or selector switch
and one 2 in. flush-mounting gauge.
K514
22-157
Mounting bracket for two PNEUMODULAR gradual or selector switch
and two 2 in. flush-mounting gauges.
Description
PNEUMO
DULAR
Accessori
es
PNEUMODULAR Accessories
Illustration
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
PNEUMODULAR
LABL-1

Adhesive label for PNEUMODULAR panels, red letters on beige
background, 4-3/4 x 1-1/2 in., 100 per roll.
LABL-2

Adhesive label for PNEUMODULAR panels, red letters on beige
background, 3-7/8 x 1-1/2 in., 100 per roll.
MCS-BP1 a
22-101
10 x 2 in. one place backplate, aluminum.
MCS-BP4 a
22-104
10 x 8 in. four place backplate, aluminum.
MCS-BP6 a
22-106
10 x 12 in. six place backplate, aluminum.
MCS-BP10 a
22-110
10 x 20 in. ten place backplate, aluminum.
MCS-BP12 a
22-112
10 x 24 in. twelve place backplate, aluminum.
MCS-CP
22-144
Cover plate for an unused MCS-S socket.
MCS-CT
22-143
Check valve tee. Mounts on upper end of MCS-S socket; permits
connection to field-mounted devices.
MCS-CV
22-137
Check valve. Mounts on upper end of MCS-S socket.
MCS-EB
22-136
Electrical barrier. Covers wiring terminals of MCS-EC.

2890-536
CONTROL SYSTEM
PNEUMODULAR
CONTROL SYSTEM
Description
Package of 10 MCS-EB.
a Includes necessary mounting screws.
183
PNEUMODULAR Accessories
Illustration
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
MCS-EC
22-122

2890-522
MCS-G
22-133

2890-533
Description
Electrical connector. Slip-locks into lower end of MCS-S socket.
Package of 10 MCS-EC.
Neoprene sealing gasket used when mounting devices on MCS-S.
Neoprene sealing gasket quantity package (25).
MCS-GA
22-138
Gauge adaptor, 1/8 in.-27 fpt threads for adapting standard pressure
gauges for insertion into MCS-CV check valve and MCS-CT check
valve tee. Also for all 2 x 2 room thermostats, humidistat, and
transmitters.
MCS-GM
22-121
Gauge module allows internal panel mounting of three pressure
and/or receiver gauges; use with MCS-GMF gauge-mounting fittings
(one for each gauge).
MCS-GMF
22-139
Drop-eared gauge mounting fitting, receives 1/8 in. NPT stemmounted gauge. Has one barbed fitting. Used with MCS-GM.
MCS-LABEL
22-132
Card of socket labels (24 per card).
MCS-MS
22-135
#6-1/4 in. mounting screw for mounting MCS-GM to backplate,
included with MCS-GM.

2890-535
MCS-GA
184
#6-1/4 in. mounting screw quantity package (100).
PNEUMODULAR Accessories
Illustration
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
MCS-PLUG
22-140
—
2890-540
MCS-PS
22-130
—
2890-530
MCS-PTS
22-142
Pneumatic terminal strip, has 10 connections. Use MCS-TUBE to
connect to Pneumodular components, and 1/4” O.D. tubing to make
connections to field-mounted devices.
MCS-S
22-120
MCS-S includes socket with MCS-PS Installed.
Package of 20 MCS-S.
Socket assembly

2890-520
MCS-S-P

MCS-S-P includes:
One MCS-PS
One MCS-G
Four MCS-SCREW
Fifteen MCS-PLUG
MCS-SC

Neoprene sealing cap for closing poly-tube air lines. Use with 1/4”
barbed coupling.
MCS-SCREW
22-134
—
2890-534
MCS-TC
22-141
—
2890-541
Description
Sealing plug for sealing unused connections of MCS-S socket.
(Connections of unused vertical rows need not be plugged).
Package of 250 MCS-PLUG.
Replacement plug strip for top access holes in MCS-S (has five
barbed plugs). (Included as part of MCS-S) socket.
Package of 20 MCS-PS.
Package of 20 MCS-S.
Socket assembly
Note: Use only MCS-TUBE on MCS-S tubing connections.
#6-1/2 in. double Plastite® mounting screw; mounts PNEUMODULAR
devices to MCS-S socket.
#6-1/2 in. double plastite mounting screw quantity package (100).
Tubing connector for connecting 1/4 in. plastic tubing to top of MCS-S
socket.
Note: Use only MCS-TUBE with MCS-TC.
Package of 50 MCS-TC.
500 ft. roll of 9/32 in. O.D. polyurethane tubing for use with MCS-S.
MCS-TUBE
2803-500

2803-100
Note: All connections to Pneumodular MCS-S socket must be made
with MCS-TUBE. Do not attempt to use any other tubing.
100 ft. roll of 9/32 in. O.D. polyurethane tubing for use with MCS-S.
185
PNEUMODULAR Accessories
Illustration
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
N4-150
22-145
N100-2366

N100-2500
21-152
Description
Restrictor - adjustable needle valve for MCS-TUBE only. Has two
barbed fittings.
Drop eared gauge mounting tee.
Inline check valve will operate on 1/4 psi differential.
Note: Body is marked IN and OUT.
N100-2501
21-153
In-line restrictor, 1 scfh. (0.0063 in. Dia. restrictor) for use with
NCS-TUBE or 1/4 in. poly tube.
N100-2502
21-721
Main air header 3/8 in. fpt input port and nine output ports for
MCS-TUBE tubing.
2890-500 PNEUMODULAR Parts Kit
Wholesale
Model No.
22-122
186
Description
Electrical contact assembly.
22-130
Plug strip.
22-140
Sealing plug.
22-133
Neoprene sealing gasket.
22-134
#6-1/2” double plastite mounting screw.
22-135
#6-1/4” mounting screw for mounting MCS-GM to backplate.
22-136
Electrical barrier.
22-137
Check valve assembly.
22-138
Gauge adaptor, 1/8” fpt threads for adapting standard pressure gauges for insertion into MCS-CV.
22-139
Drop-eared gauge mounting fitting.
22-141
Tubing connector for connecting 1/4” plastic tubing.
PNEUMODULAR Accessories
PNEUMO
DULAR
Panels
Description.a
Model No.
Barber-Colman
Logo
Wholesale
Model No.
Robertshaw
Logo

PCP-12BD
22-180
PCP-12WL-BC
PCP-12WL
22-181

PCP-6BD
22-183
PCP-6WL-BC
PCP-6WL
22-184
a
Dimensions
in. (cm)
HxWxD
21 x 30 x 7
(53 x 76 x 18)
21 x 18 x 7
(53 x 46 x 18)
For detailed assembly directions, refer to the PNEUMODULAR
Description
Solid door, left or right hinged 12-place
Window door, left hinged 12-place
Solid door, left or right hinged 6-place
Window door, left hinged 6-place
 Panel General Instructions.
Parts Required to Field Assemble a Specific PNEUMODULAR Panel.
Wholesale Part No.
PCP-6BD
PCP-6WL
RNG-6
Part No.

X
X
RNG-12

DOOR-6B

DOOR-6WL

DOOR-12B

DOOR-12WL

BEZ-6

PCP-12BD
PCP-12WL
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BEZ-12

PLEX-6
22-196
PLEX-12
22-195
N100-9915
21-617
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Specifications
Construction
16 gage steel throughout. Doors have spring loaded pivot hinge and key-operated latch to prevent
tampering.
Finish
Brown baked semi-gloss enamel.
Mounting
Surface or free standing using available panel stand.
Knockouts
Provided on four sides of cabinet.
187
PNEUMODULAR Accessories
Illustration
188
Model No.
Wholesale
Model No.
Description
BEZ-6

Bezel and backplate assembly, 6-place panel. (Shown)
BEZ-12

Bezel and backplate assembly, 12-place panel.
DOOR-6B

Blank door, left or right hinged, 6-place panel.
DOOR-12B

Blank door, left or right hinged, 12-place panel.
DOOR-6WL

Door with cutout for PLEX-6 window, left hinged.
DOOR-12WL

Door with cutout for PLEX-12 window, left hinged.
RNG-6

Ring, 6-place PNEUMODULAR panel.
RNG-12

Ring, 12-place PNEUMODULAR panel.
N100-9915
21-617
Lock and key assembly, for panels.
PLEX-6
22-196
Plexiglass window, 6-place panel (shown).
PLEX-12
22-195
Plexiglass window, 12-place panel.
Tools
Tools
Illustration
Model No.
Description
TOOL-074
Insertion tool  5/32 in. plastic tube.
TOOL-076
Adaptor-branch line and test gauge for TK-5xxx and TKR-5xxx type pneumatic room
thermostat.
Also included in TOOL-096.
TOOL-077
Adaptor-test gauge to branch line for TK-2xxx, TK-3xxx, and TK-4xxx type pneumatic bulb
thermostat.
Can be used with TOOL-087. Also included in TOOL-096.
TOOL-078
Adaptor for test gauge TOOL-077 to branch test port for HK-1x12, TK-1xxx, T K-6xxx,
TK-8xxx, TK-9xxx, and TK-1xxxx type pneumatic thermostat.
Also included in TOOL-095-1 and TOOL-096.
TOOL-079
Spring hook to disconnect springs on TK Series pneumatic thermostats.
TOOL-082
Pocket wrench with 5/64 in. Allen wrench for branch test port on TK Series pneumatic
thermostats and locking cover screws and 0.048 in. 6-spline wrench for thermostat
clalibration.
TOOL-085
Manual hand pump bulb for pumping up actuators to check linkage. Also included in TOOL095-1.
TOOL-086
Gauges and tubing for adapting TOOL-085 to both barbed and compression fittings.
TOOL-087
Needle and adaptor for use with 1/4 in. plastic tubing for TK Series thermostats.
TOOL-090
Branch test adaptor with gauge for Johnson thermostats.
189
Tools
Illustration
190
Model No.
Description
TOOL-091
Branch test adaptor without gauge for Johnson thermostats. Also included in TOOL-090.
TOOL-095-1
Pneumatic calibration tool kit. Calibrates all Invensys pneumatic equipment.
Kit includes:
• MCS-GA, gauge adaptor.
• N2-4, 2 x 2, 1/16 in. hexhead thermostat calibration cover screw wrench.
• Female branch tee (1/4 barb x 1/4 barb x 1/8 in. FPT).
• TOOL-011: calibration wrench.
• TOOL-078: adaptor.
• TOOL-080-1: changeover wrench.
• TOOL-082: combination wrench.
• TOOL-083: thermostat calibration wrench.
• TOOL-085: hand pump bulb.
• TOOL-087: needle and adaptor.
• TOOL-110: 3/32 in. hex wrench.
• AL-362: 0 to 30 psi gauge.
• Air line tubing for barbed fitting.
• Air line tubing with compression fitting.
• 3/16 x 4 in. blade screwdriver.
TOOL-096
Pneumatic thermostat calibration kit, for TK-Series thermostats.
Kit includes:
• TOOL-076: adaptor.
• TOOL-077: adaptor.
• TOOL-078: adaptor.
• TOOL-080-1: changeover wrench.
• TOOL-083: thermostat calibration wrench.
• TOOL-111: 5/64 in. Allen wrench.
• TOOL-112: 7/64 in. Allen wrench.
• Three AL-362, 0 to 30 psi gauges
TOOL-100
Calibration instrument for pneumatic transmitter/receiver controller systems.
TOOL-100-500
Calibration instrument for pneumatic transmitter/receiver controller systems.
Tools
Illustration
Model No.
Description
TOOL-110
3/32 in. hex wrench.
TOOL-111
5/64 in. Allen wrench.
TOOL-112
7/64 in. Allen wrench.
TOOL-113
0.035 in. Allen wrench.
191
The Full Line of Components
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
PRODUCTS
PNEUMATIC
PRODUCTS
VALVES
Invensys Building Systems
1354 Clifford Avenue
P.O. Box 2940
Loves Park, IL 61132-2940
United States of America
www.invensysibs.com
F-27383
©2005 Invensys plc. All rights reserved.
Printed in USA
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement